Saab 9-7 2006 Owner's manual

Saab 9-7 2006 Owner's manual
2006 Saab 9-7X Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-6
Safety Belts
.............................................. 1-8
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-27
Airbag System
......................................... 1-51
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-67
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-3
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-8
Windows ................................................. 2-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-20
Mirrors .................................................... 2-31
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-43
Universal Home Remote System
................ 2-46
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-50
Moonroof
................................................ 2-55
Vehicle Personalization
............................. 2-55
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-19
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-25
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-43
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-58
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-39
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
................. 5-10
All-Wheel Drive
........................................ 5-46
Rear Axle
............................................... 5-47
Front Axle
............................................... 5-48
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-49
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-49
Windshield Replacement
........................... 5-53
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-53
Tires
...................................................... 5-56
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-89
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-97
Electrical System ...................................... 5-98
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-108
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Saab Automobile, Saab Cars USA, SAAB, Saab 9-7X,
9-7X and the Saab Emblem are registered trademarks
of Saab Automobile, AB.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes after
that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada
Limited” for Saab Automobile, AB whenever it appears in
this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if it is
needed while you are on the road. If the vehicle is sold,
leave this manual in the vehicle.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 0697X A First Printing
ii
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle. If this is
done, it can help you learn about the features and
controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work
together in the owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page
number where it can be found.
© 2005 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or
“Do Not let this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then
we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard.
Please read these cautions. If you do not, you or others
could be hurt.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols
instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text
describing the operation or information relating to a
specific component, control, message, gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different
words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the following
topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Power Seats ..................................................1-2
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-2
Heated Seats .................................................1-3
Power Reclining Seatbacks ..............................1-4
Head Restraints .............................................1-5
Rear Seats .......................................................1-6
Rear Seat Operation .......................................1-6
Safety Belts .....................................................1-8
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-8
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-12
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-13
Driver Position ..............................................1-14
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-20
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-21
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-21
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ....................1-24
Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-26
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-26
Child Restraints .............................................1-27
Older Children ..............................................1-27
Infants and Young Children ............................1-29
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-33
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-38
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) ......................................1-39
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position .........................1-44
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Rear Seat Position ..........................1-47
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ............................1-47
Airbag System ...............................................1-51
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-54
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-57
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-59
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-59
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-60
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-61
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-65
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-66
Restraint System Check ..................................1-67
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-67
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash ...1-68
1-1
Front Seats
Power Lumbar
Power Seats
Your vehicle has power lumbar on the driver’s and front
passenger’s seats.
The power seat controls
are located on the outboard
side of the front seat
cushions. The horizontal
control adjusts the seat
cushion and the vertical
control adjusts the
seatback.
The seatback lumbar
support can be adjusted
by moving the control
located on the outboard
side of the seat cushions.
• Move the front of the horizontal seat control up or
down to adjust the front portion of the cushion.
• Move the rear of the horizontal seat control up or
down to adjust the rear portion of the cushion.
• Lift up or push down on the center of the horizontal
seat control to move the entire seat up or down.
• To move the seat forward or rearward, slide the
horizontal seat control forward or rearward.
• To recline the seatback, press the vertical control
rearward. To raise the seatback, press the vertical
control forward. See Power Reclining Seatbacks on
page 1-4 for more information.
1-2
To increase or decrease support, hold the control
forward or rearward.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes,
as it may during long trips, so should the position of
your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
Heated Seats
Your vehicle may have
heated front seats. The
buttons used to control this
feature are located on
the front door armrests.
The engine must be
running for the heated
seat feature to work.
To heat the entire seat, press the horizontal button with
the heated seat symbol. Press the button repeatedly
to cycle through the temperature settings of high,
medium, low and off. The indicator lights above the
button will glow to designate the level of heat selected:
three for high, two for medium, and one for low. The
low setting warms the seatback and seat cushion until
the seat temperature is near body temperature. The
medium and high settings heat the seatback and seat
cushion to a slightly higher temperature. You will be able
to feel heat in about two minutes.
To heat only the seatback, press the button with the
words BACK ONLY. An indicator light on the switch
will glow to designate that only the seatback is being
heated. Additional presses will cycle through the
heat levels for the seatback only.
The feature will shut off automatically when the ignition
is turned off.
1-3
Power Reclining Seatbacks
Your vehicle may have this feature. The vertical power
seat control described earlier allows the seatback to
recline. See Power Seats on page 1-2 for more
information.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
But do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-4
Head Restraints
Pull the head restraint up to
raise it. Press the release
button, located at the base
of the head restraint, and
push the head restraint
down to lower it.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is
closest to the top of the occupant’s head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
1-5
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
The rear seatback levers
are located on the outboard
side of each rear seatback.
Your vehicle has a 60/40 folding rear seat which lets
you fold the seatbacks down for more cargo space.
Pull the seatback toward you as you lift up on the lever.
Pull up on the loop located where the seat cushion meets
the seatback to fold the seat cushion up and out of the
way. This will allow the seatbacks to fold flat and increase
the cargo area.
1-6
The head restraint will automatically fold out of the way
when the seatback is folded down.
To raise the seatback, lift up the seatback and push
until it locks into the upright position. Push and pull on
each seatback to make sure they are latched securely.
Then fold the bottom seat cushion back into place.
To return the head restraint to the upright position,
reach behind the seat and pull the restraint up until it
locks into place. Push and pull on the head restraint to
make sure that it is latched securely.
1-7
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash
and you are not wearing a safety belt, your
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can
be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash,
you might not be, if you are buckled up. Always
fasten your safety belt, and check that your
passengers’ belts are fastened properly too.
{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle that
is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light that
comes on as a reminder to
buckle up. See Safety Belt
Reminder Light on
page 3-28.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
1-8
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or
killed.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up
does matter...a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-9
Put someone on it.
1-10
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-11
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, even
if you are upside down. And your chance of being
conscious during and after an accident, so you can
unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are
belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-12
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are supplemental
systems only; so they work with safety belts — not
instead of them. Every airbag system ever offered for
sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if you
are in a vehicle that has airbags, you still have to
buckle up to get the most protection. That is true not
only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and
other collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond
your control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules for
smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your
vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-27 or Infants and
Young Children on page 1-29. Follow those rules for
everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
1-13
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-26.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
1-14
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-15
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-16
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-17
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-18
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width
of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work properly,
or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-19
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of
the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother.
When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that
the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women,
as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is
wearing them properly.
1-20
Right Front Passenger Position
Rear Seat Passengers
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-14.
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one thing.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the
way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.
If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way and
start again.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can
strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
1-21
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here is how to wear one properly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way
and start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-26.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
1-22
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-23
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When attached to a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt away
from the neck and head.
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into
the slots of the guide.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position in
the rear seat. Here is how to attach the comfort guide to
the shoulder belt.
1. Slide the guide off of its storage clip located
between the interior body and the seatback.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-24
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-21.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Slide the guide back onto its storage clip located
between the interior body and the seatback.
1-25
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver
and right front passenger. Although you cannot see them,
they are located on the retractor part of the safety belts.
They help the safety belts reduce a person’s forward
movement in a moderate to severe frontal, near frontal
or side crash or a rollover.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-68.
1-26
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to order
it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender
will be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury,
do not let someone else use it, and use it only for the
seat it is made to fit. The extender has been designed for
adults. Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,
just attach it to the regular safety belt. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that comes
with the extender.
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,
just touching the top of the thighs. It should never be
worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe
or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-27
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window, move
the child toward the center of the vehicle. Also see
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides on page 1-24. If
the child is sitting in the center rear seat passenger
position, move the child toward the safety belt
buckle. In either case, be sure that the shoulder belt
still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the
child’s upper body would have the restraint the belts
provide.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-28
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
1-29
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash
a baby will become so heavy it is not possible
to hold it. For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms. A baby should be secured in
an appropriate restraint.
1-30
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts
offer protection for adults and older children,
but not for young children and infants. Neither
the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide.
1-31
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a
motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety
standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint, state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-32
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in
a rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so
the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed to
restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface.
Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the center
of the vehicle.
1-33
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
1-34
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which is
purchased by the vehicle’s owner. To help reduce
injuries, an add-on child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child restraints,
the child has to be secured within the child restraint.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some
high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be sure
the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle.
If it is, it will have a label saying that it meets federal
motor vehicle safety standards. Then follow the
instructions for the restraint. You may find these
instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet,
or both.
1-35
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
1-36
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-39 for more information. A child
can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is
not properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint
in your vehicle — even when no child is in it.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
There are several systems for securing the child within
the child restraint. One system, the three-point harness,
has straps that come down over each of the infant’s
shoulders and buckle together at the crotch. The
five-point harness system has two shoulder straps,
two hip straps, and a crotch strap. A shield may take
the place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder
straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low
against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield
has straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Make sure the child is properly
secured, following the instructions that came
with that restraint.
Because there are different systems, it is important to
refer to the instructions that come with the restraint.
A child can be endangered in a crash if the child is
not properly secured in the child restraint.
1-37
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We
recommend that child restraints be secured in a rear seat,
including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a
child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an older
child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is
because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
CAUTION:
1-38
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in the rear seat, even if the
airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will go.
It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint
in your vehicle — even when no child is in it.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. The LATCH system
holds a child restraint during driving or in a crash. This
system is designed to make installation of a child restraint
easier. The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle
and attachments on the child restraint that are made for
use with the LATCH system
Lower Anchors
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint equipped with LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
Your vehicle has lower anchors and top tether anchors.
Your child restraint may have lower attachments and
a top tether.
1-39
Top Tether Anchor
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Some top tether-equipped child restraints are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top tether. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle.
The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order
to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
1-40
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Second Row
The labels are located above a flap, at the base of the
seatback, in the rear outside seating positions. The
anchors are located under the flap. In order to get to the
anchors you will need to pull the strap at the center of
the seat where the seat cushion meets the seatback.
This will allow you to fold the seat cushion up and out of
the way. Lift the flap to expose the anchors and then
lower the seat cushion. Be sure the cushion is
locked into place.
The top tether anchors for each rear seating position
are located on the floor in the cargo area of your vehicle.
Do not use the rear tie-down brackets near the liftgate
for top tethers. Be sure to use an anchor located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position where
the child restraint will be placed.
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the seat
cushion, showing where
the anchors are located.
1-41
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position or in the third row seating position,
if the vehicle has one, if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached. There is no place to attach the top tether in
this position.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-38 for additional
information.
1-42
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the child could
be seriously injured or killed. Make sure that a
LATCH-type child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the
vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury to
people and damage to your vehicle, attach only
one child restraint per anchor.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower
anchors. If the child restraint does not have lower
attachments or the desired seating position does
not have lower anchors, secure the child restraint
with the top tether and the safety belts. Refer to your
child restraint manufacturer instructions and the
instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Pull the strap at the center of the seat where
the seat cushion meets the seatback. This will
allow you to fold the seat cushion up and out
of the way. Lift the flap to expose the anchors
and then lower the seat cushion. See Rear
Seat Operation on page 1-6 for additional
information. Be sure the cushion is locked
into place.
1.3. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.4. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the top
tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped. Refer
to the child restraint instructions and the following
steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Route and tighten the top tether according
to your child restraint instructions and the
following instructions. If your vehicle is
equipped with a cargo shade, route the top
tether between the seatback and the cargo
shade.
1-43
Fold down the head
restraint and route the
single tether under the
head restraint and in
between the head restraint
posts. See Rear Seat
Operation on page 1-6.
Fold down the head
restraint and route the
dual tether around the head
restraint. See Rear Seat
Operation on page 1-6.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-44
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH system,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 1-39.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around
the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-45
6. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends
using a top tether, attach and tighten the top tether to
the top tether anchor. Refer to the instructions that
came with the child restraint and to Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-39.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is attached
to the top tether anchor, disconnect it. Unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The
safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work
for an adult or larger child passenger.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
1-46
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Rear Seat Position
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Many child restraints are too wide to be correctly secured
in the center rear seat, although some of them will fit
there. If the center seat position is too narrow for your
child restraint, secure it in a rear outside seat position.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child
restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-38.
If you secure a child restraint in the center seat position,
follow the instructions in Securing a Child Restraint in
a Rear Outside Seat Position on page 1-44.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is designed to
turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag when
an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small child in a
forward-facing child restraint or booster seat is detected.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-61 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-30 for more
information on this including important safety information.
1-47
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in the rear seat, even if the
airbag is off.
1-48
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat position, move the seat as far back as
it will go before securing the forward-facing child restraint.
See Power Seats on page 1-2.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH system,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 1-39.
There is no top tether anchor at the right front seating
position. Do not secure a child seat in this position if
a national or local law requires that the top tether be
anchored or if the instructions that come with the child
restraint say that the top tether must be anchored.
See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 1-39 if the child restraint has a top tether.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 1-61. We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag
is off. If your child restraint is forward-facing, move
the seat as far back as it will go before securing the
child restraint in this seat. See Power Seats on
page 1-2.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you turn the ignition
to RUN or START. See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 3-30.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around
the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-49
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt. You should not be able to pull
more of the belt from the retractor once the lock
has been set.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the inside
rearview mirror will be lit and stay lit when the
key is turned to RUN or START.
1-50
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure that
the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child restraint
into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly recline
the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if
possible. Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust
the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and check
with your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for
an adult or larger child passenger.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and
another frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
Your vehicle also has roof-mounted side impact airbags
designed for either side impact or rollover deployment.
Roof-mounted side impact airbags are available for the
driver and the passenger seated directly behind the driver
and for the right front passenger and the passenger
seated directly behind that passenger.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag. But
these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job
and comply with federal regulations.
1-51
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected
from it. Airbags are “supplemental restraints”
to the safety belts. All airbags are designed to
work with safety belts but do not replace them.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy in moderate
to severe frontal and near frontal crashes.
They are not designed to inflate in rollover,
rearcrashes, or in many side crashes. And, for
some unrestrained occupants, frontal airbags
may provide less protection in frontal crashes
than more forceful airbags have provided in
the past.
CAUTION:
1-52
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
The roof-mounted side impact airbags are
designed to inflate in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the side of
your vehicle. They are not designed to inflate
in frontal or in rear crashes. The rollover
capable airbags have been designed to deploy
the roof-mounted side impact airbags in the
event of a vehicle rollover.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and roof-mounted side impact
airbags inflate with great force, faster than
the blink of an eye. If you are too close to an
inflating airbag, as you would be if you were
leaning forward, it could seriously injure you.
Safety belts help keep you in position for airbag
inflation before and during a crash. Always
wear your safety belt even with frontal airbags.
The driver should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door.
Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
the best protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety
belt system nor its airbag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children
on page 1-27 or Infants and Young Children on
page 1-29.
1-53
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
Where Are the Airbags?
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-29
for more information.
The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the steering
wheel.
1-54
The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driver and
the person seated directly behind the driver is in the
ceiling above the side windows.
1-55
{CAUTION:
The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger and the person seated directly behind that
passenger is in the ceiling above the side windows.
1-56
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. And, because your vehicle has
roof-mounted side impact airbags, never secure
anything to the roof of your vehicle by routing
the rope or tiedown through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an inflating side
impact airbag will be blocked. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account a
variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will
or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is
traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the direction
of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags,
which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal sensors,
which help the sensing system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal
impact. For moderate frontal impacts, these airbags
inflate at a level less than full deployment. For more
severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. If the
front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that does
not move or deform, the threshold level for the reduced
deployment is about 9 to 16 mph (14 to 26 km/h), and
the threshold level for a full deployment is about 18 to
25 mph (29 to 40 km/h). (The threshold level can vary,
however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can be
somewhat above or below this range.)
1-57
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
Your vehicle has seat position sensors which enable
the sensing system to monitor the position of the driver’s
seat and the right front passenger’s seat. Seat position
sensors provide information that is used to determine if
the airbags should deploy at a reduced level or at full
deployment.
1-58
Your vehicle has roof-mounted side impact airbags and
a rollover sensor. See Airbag System on page 1-51.
These “rollover capable” airbags are intended to inflate
in moderate to severe side crashes or during a rollover.
A side impact airbag will inflate if the crash severity is
above the system’s designed “threshold level.” The
threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design.
Side impact airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal or
near-frontal impacts, or rear impacts. Both roof-mounted
airbags will deploy when either side of the vehicle is
struck or during a rollover.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what
the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly
the vehicle slows down. For side impact airbags, inflation
is determined by the location and severity of the impact.
The airbag system is designed to work properly under a
wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
As always, wear your safety belt. See Off-Road Driving
on page 4-19.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. In the case
of a “rollover capable” roof-mounted side impact airbag,
the sensing system detects that the vehicle is about to roll
over. The sensing system triggers a release of gas from
the inflator, which inflates the airbag. The inflator, airbag,
and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules
inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel
in front of the right front passenger. For vehicles with
roof-mounted side impact airbags, the airbag modules
are located in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the side
windows.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force
of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But
the frontal airbags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the airbag. Roof-mounted side impact
airbags would not help you in many types of collisions,
including many frontal or near frontal collisions, and
rear impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward those airbags. Airbags should never
be regarded as anything more than a supplement to
safety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal collisions for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderate
to severe side collisions or rollovers for the roof-mounted
side impact airbags.
1-59
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so
quickly that some people may not even realize the airbag
inflated. Roof-mounted side impact airbags deflate more
slowly and may still be at least partially inflated minutes
after the vehicle comes to rest. Some components of
the airbag module — the steering wheel hub for the
driver’s airbag, the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s airbag or the ceiling of your vehicle near the
side windows — may be hot for a short time. The parts of
the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and
dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag
inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the
windshield or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it
stop people from leaving the vehicle.
1-60
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do
so. If you have breathing problems but cannot
get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates,
then get fresh air by opening a window or a
door. If you experience breathing problems
following an airbag deployment, you should
seek medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the airbags
inflate (if battery power is available). You can lock the
doors again and turn the interior lamps off by using the
door lock and interior lamp controls.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional
windshield breakage may also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger’s position. A passenger airbag
status indicator in the rearview mirror will be visible when
you turn your ignition key to START or RUN. The words
ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off, will be visible
during the system check. When the system check is
complete, either the word ON or the word OFF, or the
symbol for on or the symbol for off will be visible. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-30.
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for your
airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include airbag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders on page 7-6.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that your airbag
system will not work properly. See your dealer for
service.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada
1-61
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbag and the side airbags are not part
of the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors
that are part of the right front passenger’s seat and
safety belt. The sensors are designed to detect the
presence of a properly-seated occupant and determine
if the passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We
recommend that child restraints be secured in a rear seat,
including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a
child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an older
child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is
because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
airbag deploys.
1-62
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in the rear seat, even if the
airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will go.
It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
• the system determines that an infant is present in a
rear-facing infant seat
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a forward-facing child restraint
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat
• a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time
• the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints
• or if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator in the
rearview mirror will light and stay lit to remind you that
the airbag is off.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator
is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer to
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat
Position on page 1-47.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure that
the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child restraint
into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly recline
the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if
possible. Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust
the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and check
with your dealer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat. When
the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to
be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind
you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, depending upon the person’s seating posture
and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
1-63
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit
upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle
and have the person remain in this position for about
two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that
person and then enable the passenger’s airbag.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 3-29 for more on this, including
important safety information.
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can
affect how well the passenger sensing system operates.
You may want to consider not using seat covers or
other aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the
passenger sensing system. See Adding Equipment to
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-66 for more
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.
1-64
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an airbag
when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They
are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure
to follow proper service procedures, and make
sure the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are airbag system parts in several places around
your vehicle. You do not want the system to inflate while
someone is working on your vehicle. Your dealer and the
service manual have information about servicing your
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 7-11.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-65
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front or
sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet metal
or height, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Also, the airbag system may
not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag
sensors. If you have any questions about this, you
should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step
Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on
page 7-2.
1-66
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats,
safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic
module, or the inside rearview mirror can affect
the operation of the airbag system. If you have
questions, call Customer Assistance. The phone
numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance
are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer Satisfaction
Procedure on page 7-2.
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system does
not need regular maintenance.)
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the side
impact airbag covering on the ceiling near the side
windows, the airbag may not work properly. You
may have to replace the airbag module in the steering
wheel, both the airbag module and the instrument
panel for the right front passenger’s airbag, or side
impact airbag module and ceiling covering for
roof-mounted side impact airbags. Do not open
or break the airbag coverings.
1-67
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint systems
are working properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary replacements
made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
1-68
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
If the airbags inflate you will also need to replace
the driver and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new retractor
assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies, even
if the airbags have not deployed. The driver and front
passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies contain
the safety belt pretensioners. Have your safety belt
pretensioners checked if your vehicle has been in a
collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays on after
you start your vehicle or while you are driving. See
Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-29.
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-5
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-6
Doors and Locks .............................................2-8
Door Locks ....................................................2-8
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-9
Delayed Locking .............................................2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-12
Lockout Protection ........................................2-12
Liftgate/Liftglass ............................................2-13
Windows ........................................................2-14
Power Windows ............................................2-15
Sun Visors ...................................................2-15
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-16
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-16
PASS-Key® III ..............................................2-18
PASS-Key® III Operation ...............................2-18
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-20
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-20
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-20
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-21
Starting the Engine .......................................2-21
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ................2-22
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-23
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-24
Parking Brake ..............................................2-27
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-28
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-29
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-29
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-30
Running the Engine While Parked ...................2-30
Mirrors ...........................................................2-31
Manual Rearview Mirror with Compass ............2-31
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
OnStar® and Compass ...............................2-33
2-1
Section 2
Features and Controls
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display ..................................2-34
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Compass .................................................2-37
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Compass and Temperature Display ..............2-38
Outside Power Mirror ....................................2-42
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror .....................2-42
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-43
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-43
OnStar® System .............................................2-43
Universal Home Remote System ......................2-46
Universal Home Remote System Operation ......2-47
2-2
Storage Areas ................................................2-50
Glove Box ...................................................2-50
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-50
Overhead Console ........................................2-51
Center Console Storage Area .........................2-51
Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-52
Rear Floor Storage Lid ..................................2-53
Cargo Cover ................................................2-53
Cargo Tie Downs ..........................................2-54
Moonroof .......................................................2-55
Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-55
Memory Seat ...............................................2-55
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-3
This vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition and door lock.
It will fit with either side up.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call the
Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 7-4.
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® system with
an active subscription and you lock your keys inside the
vehicle, OnStar® may be able to send a command to
unlock your vehicle. See OnStar® System on page 2-43
for more information.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer provides the
owner with a pair of identical keys and a key code
number.
The key code number tells your dealer or a qualified
locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep this number in
a safe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll be able to have
new ones made easily using this number. Your selling
dealer should also have this number.
2-4
The key can not be removed from the ignition if your
vehicle does not have power. See Ignition Positions
on page 2-20 for additional information.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-6.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-5
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
Q (Lock):
With this system you can lock and unlock your doors from
about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the
remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your
vehicle. The remote keyless entry transmitter buttons
will not operate when the key is in the ignition.
L (Panic Alarm): Press the horn symbol to make the
horn sound. The headlamps and taillamps will also flash
for up to 30 seconds. This can be turned off by pressing
the horn button again, or by waiting for 30 seconds, or by
starting the vehicle.
K (Unlock):
Press
the unlock button to
automatically unlock the
driver’s door. The parking
lamps may flash and the
interior lights will go on.
Press the unlock button
again and all remaining
doors will unlock.
You can program different feedback settings through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). For more information
see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-43.
2-6
Press the lock button to lock all the doors.
Press the lock button again within three seconds and the
horn may chirp.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded
the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of
four transmitters matched to it.
Battery Replacement
To replace the battery in the remote keyless entry
transmitter do the following:
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
The battery is weak if the transmitter will not work at the
normal range in any location. If you have to get close to
your vehicle before the transmitter works, it is probably
time to change the battery.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display a KEY
FOB # BATTERY LOW message when the transmitter
battery is low. See “KEY FOB # BATTERY LOW” under
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-47
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not
to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
1. Remove the screw from the back of the remote
keyless entry cover and gently pry the transmitter
apart.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a three-volt
CR2032 or equivalent battery.
3. Assemble the transmitter and replace the screw.
4. Check the operation of the transmitter.
2-7
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in
a crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
2-8
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use the remote keyless entry
transmitter or the key.
From the inside, slide
the manual lever forward
or rearward.
The manual lever on each door works only that
door’s lock.
Power Door Locks
Delayed Locking
The power door lock
switches are located
on the driver’s and front
passenger’s door armrests.
Press the lock symbol to lock all of the doors. To unlock
the doors, press the other side of the switch.
This feature delays the locking of the doors and the
liftgate when using the power lock or the remote keyless
entry system.
The first press of the power door lock switch or lock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter with the
driver’s door open will activate the delay locking. A chime
will sound. All doors and the liftgate can be reopened for
up to five seconds from the time the last door is closed.
Five seconds after the last door is closed, all the doors
will lock. You can lock the doors immediately by using
the power door lock switch or by pressing the lock button
on the optional remote keyless entry transmitter a
second time.
If the key is inserted in the ignition, this feature will not
lock the doors. See Lockout Protection on page 2-12.
You can turn the delayed locking feature on or off. If the
feature is turned off, the doors will lock immediately when
a power door lock switch or remote keyless entry
transmitter lock button is pressed.
2-9
Programming Delayed Locking
To turn the delayed locking feature on or off, do the
following:
1. Press and hold the power door lock switch on the
driver’s door in the lock position.
2. Press the remote keyless entry transmitter unlock
button twice.
If the delayed locking feature was on, it will now be off.
If the feature was off, it will now be on.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock/unlock
feature which enables you to program your vehicle’s
power door locks. You can program this feature through
the Driver Information Center (DIC), or by the following
method. See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-52.
Programmable Locking Feature
Following are the two locking modes that can be
programmed:
Mode 1: All doors lock when the transmission is shifted
out of PARK (P).
Mode 2: All doors lock when the vehicle speed is
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h).
2-10
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at the
factory to lock all the doors when the transmission is
shifted into gear. The following instructions detail how
to program your door locks differently than the factory
setting. Choose one of the two programming options
listed previously before entering the program mode.
To enter the program mode, do the following:
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, with the
key in LOCK, release the turn signal/multifunction
lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch
lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a
30-second program timer will begin.
3. You are now ready to program the automatic door
locks. Select one of the two programming options
listed previously, and press the lock side of the
power door lock switch to cycle through the lock
options. You will have 30 seconds to begin
programming. If you exceed the 30-second limit,
the locks will automatically lock and unlock and
the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you have
left the program mode. If this occurs, repeat the
procedure beginning with Step 1 to re-enter the
programming mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition to RUN. The locks will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you
are leaving the program mode. If the lock/unlock switches
are not pressed while in the programming mode, the
current auto lock/unlock setting will not be modified.
See your dealer for more information.
Programmable Unlocking Feature
The following is the list of available programming
options:
Mode 1: Driver’s door unlocks when the transmission is
shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 2: All doors unlock when the transmission is
shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 3: All doors unlock when the key is removed
from the ignition.
Mode 4: No automatic door unlock.
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at the
factory to unlock all doors once the transmission is shifted
to PARK (P). The following instructions detail how to
program your door locks differently than the factory
setting. Choose one of the four programming options
listed previously before entering the program mode.
To enter the program mode you need to do the
following:
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, with
the key in LOCK, release the turn signal/multifunction
lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch
lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a
30-second program timer will begin.
3. You are now ready to program the automatic door
locks. Select one of the four programming options
listed above, and press the unlock side of the power
door lock switch to cycle through the unlocking
options. You will have 30 seconds to begin
programming. If you exceed the 30-second limit,
the locks will automatically lock and unlock and
the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you have
left the program mode. If this occurs, repeat the
procedure beginning with Step 1 to re-enter the
programming mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition to RUN. The locks will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you
are leaving the program mode. If the lock/unlock switches
are not pressed while in the programming mode, the
current auto lock/unlock setting will not be modified.
See your dealer for more information.
2-11
Rear Door Security Locks
Lockout Protection
Your vehicle may have this feature. You can lock the rear
doors so they cannot be opened from the inside by
passengers. To use one of these locks do the following:
This feature stops the power door locks from locking
when the key is in the ignition and a door is open
to protect you from locking your key in the vehicle.
1. Open one of the rear doors. You will find a security
lock lever located on the inside edge of each
rear door.
2. Move the lever down
to engage the security
lock. Move the lever
up to disengage the
security lock.
If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open
and the key is in the ignition, all the doors will lock and
then the driver’s door will unlock.
3. Close the door.
The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside while this feature is in use. If you want to open
the rear door while the security lock is on, unlock the
door and open the door from the outside.
2-12
Liftgate/Liftglass
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate or
liftglass open because carbon monoxide (CO)
gas can come into your vehicle. You cannot
see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death. If you must
drive with the liftgate open or if electrical wiring
or other cable connections must pass through
the seal between the body and the liftgate or
liftglass:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your climate control system
to its highest speed and select the control
setting that will force outside air into your
vehicle. See “Climate Control System” in
the Index.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-30.
Liftgate Release
To unlock the liftgate, use the power door lock switch
or the remote keyless entry transmitter. See Remote
Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-6. The
liftglass will also unlock when the liftgate is unlocked.
Press the button on the liftglass to open it. To open the
entire liftgate, lift the handle located in the center of the
liftgate. When the liftgate is opened, the liftglass will lock
after a short delay.
Emergency Release for Opening
Liftgate
1. Remove the trim plug, located on the inside of the
liftgate in the center, to expose the access hole in
the trim panel.
2. Use a tool to reach through the access hole in the
trim panel.
3. Pry the left release lever up to the unlock position.
Pry the right release lever up to unlatch the liftgate.
4. Reinstall the trim plug.
2-13
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless
adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or hot weather.
2-14
Power Windows
Express-Down Window
AUTO (Express-down): The driver’s and front
passenger’s window switches have an express-down
feature that allows you to lower the window without
holding the switch down. Press down briefly on the
driver’s or front passenger’s window switch labeled
AUTO to activate the express-down feature. Lightly tap
the switch to open the window slightly. The express-down
feature can be interrupted at any time by pressing the top
of the switch.
Window Lockout
o (Lockout): Your vehicle has a lockout feature to
The controls for the power windows are located on the
armrest on each of the side doors. With power windows,
the switches operate the windows when the ignition is in
RUN, ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 2-21. The driver’s door also has a switch for
each of the passenger’s windows.
Press down the top of the switch to lower the window and
pull up on the switch to raise the window. If you hold the
switch down for three to seven seconds after the window
has been completely lowered or raised, the window will
not operate for about 15 seconds.
prevent passengers from operating the power windows.
The lockout switch is located in front of the window
switches on the driver’s door. A light in the lockout switch
will come on to show that the switch has been activated.
Press the lockout switch again to return to normal
operation.
Sun Visors
Sun Visors with Slide Rod
Your vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sun visor
down to block glare. Detach the sun visor from the center
mount and slide it along the rod from side-to-side to cover
the driver or passenger side of the front window. Swing
the sun visor to the side to cover the side window. It can
also be moved along the rod from side-to-side in this
position.
2-15
Sun Visors with Fixed Rod and
Pull-out Extension
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle is
equipped with a
content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
Your vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sun visor
down to block glare. Pull the sun visor extender out for
additional coverage. Detach the sun visor from the center
mount and swing it to the side to cover the side window.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull the sun visor down to expose the vanity mirror.
You may have to lift a cover to expose the mirror.
Here is how to operate the system:
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
1. Open the door.
Your vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sun visor
down and lift the mirror cover to turn on the lamps.
The lamps will turn off when the cover is closed.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or
the remote keyless entry transmitter. The security
light should flash.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
3. Close all doors. The security light should turn off
after approximately 30 seconds. The alarm is not
armed until the security light turns off.
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
2-16
If a locked door is opened without the key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. The
headlamps and parking lamps will flash for two minutes,
and the horn will sound for 30 seconds, then will turn off
to save the battery power.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system will not activate
if you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door
lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock switch
with the door open, or with the remote keyless entry
transmitter. You should also remember that you can start
your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has
been set off.
Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
• If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the
door key after the doors are closed.
• Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any other
way will set off the alarm.
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door
with the key. You can also turn off the alarm by pressing
unlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter. The alarm
will not stop if you try to unlock a door any other way.
Testing the Alarm
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open, or
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the security light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door. This
should set off the alarm.
When the alarm is set the power door unlock switch is
not operational.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works.
The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse,
see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-98.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not
flash, the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer.
2-17
PASS-Key® III
Your PASS-Key® III system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
PASS-Key® III Operation
Your vehicle is equipped
with the PASS-Key® III
(Personalized Automotive
Security System)
theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III is a passive
theft-deterrent system.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
2-18
This means you do not have to do anything different to
arm or disarm the system. It works when you insert or
remove the key from the ignition.
When the PASS-Key® III system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s starter
and fuel systems. The starter will not work and fuel will
stop being delivered to the engine. Anyone using a
trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be
discouraged because of the high number of electrical
key codes.
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
start and the SECURITY light comes on, the key may
have a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off and
try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, you
may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-98. If the engine still does not start
with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your
vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your
dealer who can service the PASS-Key® III to have a new
key made.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III decoder to learn
the transponder value of a new or replacement key.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
This procedure is for programming additional keys only.
Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage your keys,
only a GM dealer can service PASS-Key® III to have new
keys made. To program additional keys you will require
two current driver’s keys. You must add a step to the
following procedure. After Step 2 repeat Steps 1 and 2
with the second current driver’s key. Then continue with
Step 3.
To program the new key, do the following:
1. Verify that the new key has PK3 stamped on it.
2. Insert the current driver’s key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not start,
see your dealer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to LOCK,
and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to ON
within 10 seconds of removing the previous key.
5. The SECURITY light will turn off once the key has
been programmed. It may not be apparent that the
SECURITY light went on due to how quickly the
key is programmed.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the SECURITY light comes on
and stays on, you will be able to restart your engine if you
turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III system, however, is not
working properly and must be serviced by your dealer.
Your vehicle is not protected by the PASS-Key® III
system at this time.
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key® III key, see your
dealer to have a new key made.
2-19
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
Ignition Positions
Use the key to turn
the ignition switch to
four different positions.
The ignition switch is
located on the center
console.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake, or slow, the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings are not yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
Towing a Trailer on page 4-41 for the trailer
towing capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-20
9 (OFF/LOCK):
This position locks the ignition and
transmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will only
be able to remove the key when the ignition is turned
to OFF/LOCK and the vehicle has power.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the key.
Use the correct key and turn the key only with your
hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If it is, turn
the steering wheel left and right while you turn the
key hard. If none of this works, then your vehicle
needs service.
ACC (Accessory): This position lets you use things
like the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine
is off.
Notice: Lengthy operation of features such as the
radio in the accessory ignition position may drain the
battery and prevent your vehicle from starting. Do not
operate your vehicle in the accessory ignition
position for a long period of time.
R (RUN):
This is the position for driving.
/ (START):
This position starts the engine.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) feature which will allow certain features
of your vehicle to continue to work up to 10 minutes
after the ignition key is turned to OFF/LOCK.
Your radio, power windows, DVD player, sunroof (option)
and overhead console will work when the ignition key is in
RUN or ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from RUN
to OFF/LOCK, these features will continue to work for up
to 10 minutes or until a door is opened.
Starting the Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position — that
is a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage
the transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when
your vehicle is stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be
drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can
damage your starter motor. Wait about 15 seconds
between each try to help avoid draining your battery
or damaging your starter.
2. If it does not start within 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while you
hold the ignition key in START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and let up on the accelerator
pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
2-21
When starting your engine in very cold weather
(below 0°F or −18°C), do this:
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there up to
15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go of
the key.
2. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle
starts briefly but then stops again, do the same
thing, but this time keep the pedal down for five or
six seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from the
engine.
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
If your vehicle has this feature, you can change the
position of the throttle and brake pedals. This feature is
designed for shorter drivers, since the pedals cannot
move farther away from the standard position, but can
move closer for better pedal reach. This feature can be
programmed to work with the memory function, if
equipped, on your vehicle. See Memory Seat on
page 2-55.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) for this feature to
operate.
The switch used to adjust
the pedals is located on
the steering column.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
Press the switch forward or backward to move the
pedals closer or farther away from you.
2-22
Engine Coolant Heater
If your vehicle has an engine coolant heater. In very cold
weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolant heater
can help. You will get easier starting and better fuel
economy during engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant
heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours
prior to starting your vehicle. At temperatures above
32°F (0°C), use of the coolant heater is not required.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment, behind the battery.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-Volt AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured.
Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord
will not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could
be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in?
The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact your
dealer in the area where you will be parking your vehicle.
The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
2-23
Automatic Transmission Operation
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
There are several different positions for your gear
shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the
best position to use when you start the engine because
your vehicle cannot move easily.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-28. If you
are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-41.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transmission
shift lock control system.
2-24
You have to fully apply the regular brakes before you can
shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN. If
you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the
shift lever, press the button on the shift lever and push
the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain
brake application. Move the shift lever into the gear you
wish. See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 2-29.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice
or sand without damaging your transmission, see If Your
Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-32.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do
not shift into a drive gear while your engine
is running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not running
at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
2-25
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you
need more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You will shift down to the next gear and have more
power.
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, driving on steep hills or for off-road driving.
You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD (3) or,
if necessary, a lower gear selection if the transmission
shifts too often.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving.
However, it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than DRIVE (D).
2-26
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power
but lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use
SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as
you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would
also want to use the brakes off and on.
You can also use SECOND (2) for starting the vehicle
from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power but
lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use it on
very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the gear shift
lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving
forward, the transmission will not shift into first gear until
the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your foot and pull up on the parking brake
lever located between the seats. If the ignition is on,
the brake system warning light on the instrument panel
cluster will come on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-33.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can
press in the button at the end of the lever. Hold the button
in as you move the parking brake lever all the way down.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that the
parking brake is fully released and the brake warning
light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and you must park on a hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-41.
2-27
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-41.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your foot and set
the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing the
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all
the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the key, your vehicle is in
PARK (P).
2-28
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. And,
if you leave the vehicle with the engine running,
it could overheat and even catch fire. You or
others could be injured. Do not leave your
vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running,
be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your parking
brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you have
moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift
lever away from PARK (P) without first pressing the
button on the console shift lever. If you can, it means
that the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).
Torque Lock
Parking Over Things That Burn
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever
out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into
PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat.
To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-28.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply the regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when
the ignition is in RUN. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 2-24.
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
2-29
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see
or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-30
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-30.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 4-28.
Mirrors
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-28.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-41.
Manual Rearview Mirror with
Compass
The vehicle may have a manual rearview mirror with an
eight-point compass display located in the upper right
portion of the mirror.
Mirror Operation
While sitting in a comfortable position, adjust the rearview
mirror so you can see clearly behind your vehicle. Grip it
in the center and move it up or down and side to side.
The day/night control, located at the bottom of the mirror,
adjusts the mirror to reduce headlamp glare from behind
during evening or dark conditions. Rotate the control to
the right for night time use; rotate it to the left for day use.
Compass Display
P (On/Off): Press this button to turn the compass
on or off. The compass display, can show a maximum
of two characters. For example, NE is displayed for
north-east.
When the ignition and the compass/temperature
feature are on, character boxes will appear for about
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display
the direction the vehicle is facing.
2-31
Compass Calibration
When on, the compass automatically calibrates as the
vehicle is driven. If, after two seconds, the display does
not show a compass direction, (N for North, for example),
there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with
the compass. Such interference may be caused by a
magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder, or a
similar magnetic item. If the letter C should ever appear in
the compass window, the compass may need calibration.
To adjust for compass variance do the following:
1. Find the current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map.
Press and hold the on/off button for nine seconds
to activate the compass calibration mode. CAL will
be displayed in the compass window on the mirror.
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display shows
a direction.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. The mirror
is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be
necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for
compass variance if you live outside zone eight. Under
certain conditions, such as during a long-distance,
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. If not adjusted to account for
compass variance, the compass could give false
readings.
2-32
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone
number appears in the display.
3. Once a zone number appears in the display, press
the on/off button quickly until the correct zone
number appears in the display. If C appears in
the compass window, the compass may need
calibration. See “Compass Calibration” explained
previously.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® and Compass
Your vehicle may have an automatic-dimming rearview
mirror with a compass and the OnStar® system.
®
There are three additional buttons for the OnStar
system. See your dealer for more information on the
system and how to subscribe to OnStar®. See OnStar®
System on page 2-43 for more information about the
services OnStar® provides.
Mirror Operation
When turned on, this mirror automatically dims to the
proper level to minimize glare from any headlamps
behind you after dark.
O(On/Off): This is the on/off button for the automatic
dimming feature and compass. Press the far left button,
located below the mirror face, for up to three seconds
to turn the feature on and off. A light on the mirror will
be lit while the feature is turned on.
Compass Operation
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass on
or off.
There is a compass display in the window in the upper
right corner of the mirror face. The compass displays a
maximum of two characters. For example, “NE” is
displayed for north-east.
Compass Calibration
Press and hold the on/off button down for nine seconds
to activate the compass calibration mode. CAL will
be displayed in the compass window on the mirror.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads a
direction.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. The mirror
is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be
necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for
compass variance if you live outside zone eight. Under
certain circumstances, such as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. If not adjusted to account for compass
variance, your compass could give false readings.
2-33
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the map.
3. Scroll through the zone numbers that appear in
the compass/temperature window on the mirror by
pressing the on/off button. Once you find your
zone number, release the button. After about
four seconds, the mirror will return to the compass
display, and the new zone number will be set.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display
Your vehicle may have this feature. When on, an
automatic dimming mirror automatically dims to the
proper level to minimize glare from lights behind
you after dark.
The mirror also includes a dual display in the upper right
corner of the mirror face. The compass reading and the
outside temperature will both appear in the display at the
same time.
2. Press and hold the on/off button for six seconds.
Release the button when ZONE is displayed.
The number shown is the current zone number.
2-34
P (On/Off):
This is the on/off button.
Temperature and Compass Display
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Press the on/off button, located to the far left, briefly to
turn the compass/temperature display on or off.
The automatic dimming mirror function is turned
on automatically each time the ignition is started. To
operate the automatic dimming mirror, do the following:
If the display reads CAL, you will need to calibrate the
compass. For more information on calibration, see below.
To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius do the
following:
1. Press and hold the on/off button for approximately
four seconds until either a flashing F or C appears.
2. Press the button again to change the display to the
desired unit of measurement. After approximately
four seconds of inactivity, the new unit will be locked
in and the compass/temperature display will return.
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an
extended period of time, please consult your dealer.
Under certain circumstances, a delay in updating
the temperature is normal.
1. Make sure the green indicator light, located to the left
of the on/off button, is lit. If it’s not, press and hold the
on/off button for approximately six seconds until the
green light comes on, indicating that the mirror is in
automatic dimming mode.
2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror function
by pressing and holding the on/off button for
approximately six seconds, until the green
indicator light turns off.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside of zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. Compass variance is the difference
between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic
north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance,
your compass could give false readings.
2-35
To adjust for compass variance do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
3. Keep pressing the on/off button until the desired
zone number appears in the display. Release the
button. After approximately four seconds of inactivity,
the new zone number will be locked in and the
compass/temperature display will return.
4. Calibrate the compass as described below.
Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
• After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading (N for North, for
example), there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z and a
zone number appear in the display. The compass
is now in zone mode.
2-36
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the mirror
compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push the
on/off button for approximately 12 seconds or until CAL
is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
Passenger Airbag Indicator
Compass Operation
The vehicle may be equipped with a passenger airbag
indicator, on the mirror glass, just above the buttons.
If the vehicle has this feature, the mirror will display the
word ON, or an airbag symbol in Canada, when the
passenger airbag is enabled. For more information,
see Passenger Sensing System on page 1-61.
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass on
or off.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
There is a compass display in the window in the upper
right corner of the mirror face. The compass displays a
maximum of two characters. For example, “NE” is
displayed for north-east.
Compass Calibration
Press and hold the on/off button down for nine seconds
to activate the compass calibration mode. CAL will
be displayed in the compass window on the mirror.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads a
direction.
Your vehicle may have an automatic-dimming rearview
mirror with a compass.
Compass Variance
Mirror Operation
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. The mirror
is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be
necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for
compass variance if you live outside zone eight. Under
certain circumstances, such as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. If not adjusted to account for compass
variance, your compass could give false readings.
When turned on, this mirror automatically dims to the
proper level to minimize glare from any headlamps
behind you after dark.
O(On/Off): This is the on/off button for the automatic
dimming feature and compass. Press the far left button,
located below the mirror face, for up to three seconds
to turn the feature on and off. A light on the mirror will
be lit while the feature is turned on.
2-37
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the map.
3. Scroll through the zone numbers that appear in
the compass/temperature window on the mirror by
pressing the on/off button. Once you find your
zone number, release the button. After about
four seconds, the mirror will return to the compass
display, and the new zone number will be set.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass and Temperature
Display
If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic mirror,
it will, when on, automatically dim to the proper level
to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.
The mirror also includes a display in the upper right
corner of the mirror face. The compass reading and the
outside temperature will both appear in the display at the
same time. The dual display can be turned on or off by
briefly pressing either the TEMP or the COMP button.
2. Press and hold the on/off button for six seconds.
Release the button when ZONE is displayed. The
number shown is the current zone number.
2-38
Temperature Display
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
The temperature can be displayed by pressing the
TEMP button. Pressing the TEMP button once briefly,
will toggle the temperature reading on and off. To
alternate the temperature reading between Fahrenheit
and Celsius, press and hold the TEMP button for
approximately four seconds until the display blinks F
and C. Press and release the TEMP button to toggle
between the Fahrenheit and Celsius readings. After
approximately four seconds of inactivity, the display
will stop blinking and display the last selection made.
If an abnormal reading is displayed, for an extended
period of time, please consult your dealer. Under certain
circumstances, a delay in updating the temperature is
normal.
The time period you need to press and hold the TEMP
button to turn the automatic dimming feature on or off is
approximately eight seconds. The indicator light to the left
of the TEMP button will still turn on or off to show you
when the automatic dimming feature is activated. Once
the mirror is turned off, it will remain off until it is turned
back on, or until the vehicle is restarted.
Compass Operation
Press the COMP button once briefly to turn the compass
on or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the
compass will show two character boxes for approximately
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display
the compass heading.
2-39
Compass Calibration
Compass Variance
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. Compass variance is the difference
between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic
north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance,
your compass could give false readings.
• If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle.
• After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading (N for North, for
example), there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push
in the COMP button for approximately eight seconds
or until CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
2-40
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold the COMP button for five seconds
until a zone number appears in the display.
Passenger Airbag Indicator
The mirror may be equipped with a passenger airbag
indicator on the mirror glass, just above the buttons. If the
vehicle has this feature the mirror will display the word
ON, or an airbag symbol in Canada, when the passenger
airbag is enabled. For more information see Passenger
Sensing System on page 1-61
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
3. Press the COMP button on the bottom of the mirror
until the new zone number appears in the display.
After you stop pressing the button, the display will
show a compass direction within a few seconds.
2-41
Outside Power Mirror
The outside power mirror
control is located on the
driver’s door.
If you reach the mirror’s end of the travel position in any
direction, the mirror will enter a ratcheting mode. This
action is harmless. It is a warning that the mirror can go
no further. To stop this action, back the mirror up by
moving the control in the opposite direction.
Fold the mirror in manually before entering a car wash.
To do this, pull the mirror in toward the vehicle. Push
the mirror back out when finished.
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror
1. Turn the knob toward the mirror you desire to
adjust.
2. Move the control in the direction you want the
mirror to go.
3. Adjust the mirror in all four directions so that you
can see the side of your vehicle and the area
behind your vehicle.
4. After adjusting each mirror, turn the control to the
center position so the mirror cannot be moved.
2-42
The passenger’s outside mirror will adjust to a preset tilt
position while the vehicle is in REVERSE (R) gear. Curb
view assist may be useful when you are parallel parking.
The mirror will return to normal position when the vehicle
is shifted out of REVERSE (R) gear. Automatic mirror
movement in either direction will follow a short delay.
You can turn this feature on or off through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Customization
on page 3-52.
Outside Convex Mirror
OnStar® System
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right or left lane,
you could hit a vehicle. Check your inside
mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
The passenger’s outside mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver’s seat.
Outside Heated Mirrors
When you operate the rear window defogger, a defogger
also warms the heated driver’s and passenger’s outside
rearview mirrors to help clear them of ice, snow and
condensation.
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and live advisors
to provide you with a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services. If your airbags
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic call
to OnStar® Emergency where we can request emergency
services be sent to your location. If you lock your keys in
the car, call OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can
send a signal to unlock your doors. If you need roadside
assistance, press the OnStar® button and they will get
you the help you need.
2-43
A complete OnStar® User’s Guide and the Terms
and Conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca, contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827), or press the blue OnStar® button to
speak to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days
a week.
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca.
OnStar® Services
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe and
Sound Plan is included for one year from the date of
purchase. You can extend this plan beyond the first year,
or upgrade to the Directions and Connections® Plan to
meet your needs. For more information, press the
OnStar® button to speak to an advisor.
2-44
Safe and Sound Plan
• Advanced Automatic Collision Notification
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Tracking
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
Directions and Connections® Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
OnStar® Personal Calling
As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling capability
allows you to make hands-free calls using a wireless
system that is integrated into the vehicle. Calls can be
placed nationwide using simple voice commands with no
additional contracts and no additional roaming charges.
To find out more about OnStar® Personal Calling, refer
to the OnStar® User’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box,
visit www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak to an
OnStar® advisor by pressing the blue OnStar® button or
calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Your vehicle may have Virtual Advisor. It is a feature
of OnStar® Personal Calling that uses minutes to
access weather, local traffic reports, and stock quotes.
By pressing the phone button and giving a few simple
voice commands, you can browse through the
various topics. Customize your information profile at
www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® User’s Guide
for more information.
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may be
equipped with a Talk/Mute
button that can be used
to interact with OnStar®.
See Audio Steering Wheel
Controls on page 3-98
for more information.
When calling into voice-mail systems, or to dial directory
numbers, press this button once, wait for the response,
say the number(s) to be dialed, wait for the number(s)
to be repeated and then say “dial”. See the OnStar®
User’s Guide for more information.
2-45
Universal Home Remote
System
If your vehicle is equipped with the Universal Home
Remote Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
The Universal Home Remote System, a combined
universal transmitter and receiver, provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held transmitters used to
activate devices such as gate operators, garage door
openers, entry door locks, security systems, and home
lighting.
2-46
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newer
garage door opener with rolling codes, please be sure to
follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete the programming of
your Universal Home Remote Transmitter.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the Universal Home Remote. Because of the
steps involved, it may be helpful to have another person
available to assist you in the programming steps.
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote
programming. It is also recommended that upon the sale
of the vehicle, the programmed Universal Home Remote
buttons should be erased for security purposes. See
“Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later in this
section or, for assistance, see Customer Assistance
Offices on page 7-3.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Programming Universal Home Remote
Follow these steps to program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside Universal
Home Remote buttons, releasing only when the
Universal Home Remote indicator light begins
to flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or
third hand-held transmitter to the remaining
two Universal Home Remote buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter
about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
Universal Home Remote buttons while keeping
the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
Universal Home Remote button and the hand-held
transmitter button. Do not release the buttons
until Step 4 has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after Universal Home Remote successfully
receives the frequency signal from the hand-held
transmitter. Release both buttons.
2-47
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal Home
Remote button and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and your device should activate when the
Universal Home Remote button is pressed and
released.
To program the remaining two Universal Home
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do not
repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the programmed
channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and
then turns to a constant light, continue with Steps 6
through 8 following to complete the programming of
a rolling-code equipped device, most commonly, a
garage door opener.
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the motor-head unit.
2-48
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed Universal Home Remote button for
two seconds, then release. Repeat the press/hold/
release sequence a second time, and depending on
the brand of the garage door opener, or other rolling
code device, repeat this sequence a third time to
complete the programming.
The Universal Home Remote should now activate
your rolling-code equipped device.
To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote
buttons, begin with Step 2 of “Programming Universal
Home Remote.” You do not want to repeat Step 1, as this
will erase all previous programming from the Universal
Home Remote buttons.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for Universal
Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured
to time out in the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door opener
by using the “Programming Universal Home Remote”
procedures, regardless of where you live, replace Step 3
under “Programming Universal Home Remote” with the
following:
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote
button while you press and release every two seconds
(cycle) the hand-held transmitter button until the
frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the
Universal Home Remote. The Universal Home Remote
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” to complete.
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote
button for at least half of a second. The indicator light
will come on while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
To erase programming from the three Universal Home
Remote buttons do the following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer
than 30 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
The Universal Home Remote is now in the train (learning)
mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with
Step 2 under “Programming Universal Home Remote”
shown earlier in this section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button” following this section.
2-49
Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button
To program a device to Universal Home Remote using
a Universal Home Remote button previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home
Remote button. Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the Universal
Home Remote button, proceed with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote” shown
earlier in this section.
For additional information on Universal Home Remote,
see Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-3.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Open the glove box by pulling up on the handle.
2-50
Cupholder(s)
Your vehicle is equipped
with a cupholder on the
instrument panel next to
the radio. To open the
cupholder, push once on
the arm and the cupholder
will move into position
for use. To close the
cupholder, lift the arm up
towards the instrument
panel.
A molded cupholder is located on the front of the center
console and two more are located at the rear of the
center console. To use the rear cupholders, pull down
on the lid.
Overhead Console
Center Console Storage Area
Your vehicle may have this feature. The overhead
console may include reading lamps, a Universal Home
Remote, and a moonroof switch. See the following
for more information:
If equipped, squeeze the front lever while lifting the top
to open it.
The console may contain one or more of the following
components:
• Rear Seat Audio Controls. See Rear Seat Audio
(RSA) on page 3-96 for more information.
• Rear Climate Control. See Rear Climate Control
System on page 3-24 for more information.
• Accessory Power Outlets. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 3-18 for more information.
• Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-20.
If your vehicle has the center armrest compartment,
lift the cover by pulling up on the latch handle located
underneath the front edge of the armrest.
• Reading Lamps on page 3-18
• Universal Home Remote System on page 2-46
• Moonroof on page 2-55
2-51
Luggage Carrier
{CAUTION:
If you try to carry something on top of your
vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
carrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattress and
so forth — the wind can catch it as you drive
along. This can cause you to lose control. What
you are carrying could be violently torn off, and
this could cause you or other drivers to have a
collision, and of course damage your vehicle.
You may be able to carry something like this
inside. But, never carry something longer or
wider than the luggage carrier on top of your
vehicle.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a luggage carrier
that allows you to load things on top of your vehicle. The
luggage carrier, if equipped, has side rails attached to the
roof, and places to use for tying things down. These let
you load some other things on top of your vehicle, as long
as they are not wider or longer than the luggage carrier.
2-52
Crossrails can be purchased from your dealer.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangs over the
rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your vehicle.
Load cargo so that it rests on the slats as far forward
as possible and against the side rails, making sure to
fasten it securely.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-33.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier
is locked and cargo is still securely fastened.
When the luggage carrier is not in use, place the
crossrails at the following positions for reduced wind
noise. Place one crossrail at the rear most point of the
vehicle and the other crossrail above the opening of
the rear door.
Rear Floor Storage Lid
{CAUTION:
If any removable convenience item is not
secured properly, it can move around in a
collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle
could be injured. Be sure to secure any such
item properly.
Your vehicle has a rear cargo area with a removable
storage lid.
Cargo Cover
If your vehicle has a cargo cover, you can use it to
cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle.
To install the cargo cover, do the following:
1. Align the endcap with the pocket in the trim panel
located behind the rear seat.
2. Squeeze the opposite endcap, align it with the
pocket located on the opposite side of the trim
panel and release.
3. Grasp the handle and unroll the cover. Latch the
posts into the sockets on the inside of the vehicle
to secure it.
To remove the rear floor storage lid, do the following:
1. Press the latch release and lift up the latch handle.
2. Raise the lid slightly to unhook it.
3. Pull the lid toward you to release it from the forward
mounting slots.
To reinstall the rear floor storage lid, reverse the
previous steps. Make sure the lid is secure by applying
slight pressure to the latch until you hear it click.
2-53
To remove the cargo cover, do the following:
1. Release the cover from the latch posts and carefully
roll it back up.
2. Squeeze one endcap and remove it from the
pocket in the trim panel.
3. Remove the cargo cover from the other endcap so
that you can remove the shade from the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
An improperly stored cargo cover could be
thrown about the vehicle during a collision
or sudden maneuver. You or others could be
injured. If you remove the cover, always store it
in the proper storage location. When you put it
back, always be sure that it is securely
reattached.
2-54
Cargo Tie Downs
There may be cargo tie
downs in the rear of your
vehicle that allow you to
strap cargo in and keep it
from moving.
Moonroof
Vehicle Personalization
The vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
moonroof. The ignition must be on, or turned to ACC,
or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active
to operate it. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 2-21.
In addition to the following features, your vehicle may
also have features that can be programmed through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 3-52 for more information.
The moonroof switch is
located in the overhead
console.
Press and release the back of the button to open the
moonroof. Press and hold the front of the button to close
the moonroof.
With the moonroof closed, press the front of the button
to open the moonroof to the vent position.
The moonroof has a sunshade which can be pulled
forward to block sun rays. If the sunshade is in the closed
position, it will open when the moonroof is opened.
Memory Seat
The controls for the
memory function are
located on the driver’s door.
These buttons are used to program and recall memory
settings for the driver’s seating position, both outside
mirror positions, and the adjustable pedals, if equipped.
The settings for these features can be saved for up to
two drivers.
2-55
To store the memory settings, do the following:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback
recliner and lumbar, both of the outside mirrors,
and the adjustable pedals, if equipped, to the
desired position.
2. Press and hold the 1 or 2 button of the memory
control for three seconds. A double chime will
sound to let you know that the position has been
stored.
To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow
the preceding steps, pressing the other numbered
memory control button.
To recall the memory settings, press and release
button 1 or 2 while the vehicle is in PARK (P). A single
chime will sound and the memory position will be
recalled.
To stop recall movement of the memory seat feature at
any time, press one of the memory buttons or power
seat controls.
Easy Exit Seat
The control for the easy exit seat function is located on
the driver’s door below the memory buttons 1 and 2. The
easy exit seat button is used to program and recall the
desired driver’s seat position when exiting or entering
the vehicle. The mirrors, power lumbar, recline, and
adjustable pedals, if equipped, positions will not be stored
or recalled when using the easy exit seat function. The
seat position can be saved for up to two drivers.
2-56
To store the easy exit seat position, do the following:
1. Press and release the 1 or 2 button of the memory
control for less than three seconds. The seat will
move to the stored memory position.
2. Adjust the seat to the desired exit position.
3. Press and hold the easy exit seat button for more
than three seconds. A double chime will sound to
let you know that the position has been stored
for the selected button 1 or 2.
To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow the
preceding steps, pressing the other numbered memory
control button.
To recall the easy exit seat position, do one of the
following:
• Press the easy exit seat button on the memory
control while the vehicle is in PARK (P). The
seat will move to the stored exit position.
• Or, if the easy exit seat feature is activated in the
Driver Information Center (DIC), removing the key
from the ignition will move the seat to the exit
position. See “Easy Exit Seat” under DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 3-52 for more information
on activating this feature in the DIC.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9
Windshield Washer .......................................3-10
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...........................3-10
Headlamp Washer ........................................3-11
Cruise Control ..............................................3-11
Headlamps ..................................................3-14
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-15
Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-15
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-16
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-17
Dome Lamps ...............................................3-17
Dome Lamp Override ....................................3-17
Entry Lighting ...............................................3-18
Exit Lighting .................................................3-18
Reading Lamps ............................................3-18
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-18
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-18
Climate Controls ............................................3-19
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-19
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-24
Rear Climate Control System .........................3-24
Climate Controls Personalization .....................3-25
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-25
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-26
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-27
Trip Odometer ..............................................3-27
Tachometer .................................................3-27
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-28
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light .............3-28
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-29
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-30
Charging System Light ..................................3-32
Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-32
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-33
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-34
StabiliTrak® Service Light ...............................3-35
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ..............................3-35
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-36
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-36
Oil Pressure Gage ........................................3-39
Security Light ...............................................3-40
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-40
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Reduced Engine Power Light .........................3-40
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-41
Service All-Wheel Drive Light .........................3-41
Check Gages Warning Light ...........................3-41
Gate Ajar Light .............................................3-42
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-42
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-43
Check Gas Cap Light ....................................3-43
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-43
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-44
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-47
DIC Vehicle Customization .............................3-52
3-2
Audio System(s) .............................................3-58
Setting the Time ...........................................3-59
Radio with CD ..............................................3-60
Radio with Six-Disc CD .................................3-73
Navigation/Radio System ...............................3-84
Rear Seat Entertainment System ....................3-84
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................3-96
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-97
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-98
Radio Reception ...........................................3-99
Care of Your CDs and DVDs .........................3-99
Care of the CD and DVD Player ...................3-100
Fixed Mast Antenna ....................................3-100
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............3-100
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-24.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
C. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio Steering
Wheel Controls on page 3-98.
D. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.
E. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-26.
F. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever. See Windshield
Wipers on page 3-9.
G. Hazard Warning Flashers Button and Driver
Information Center Buttons. See Hazard Warning
Flashers on page 3-6 or Driver Information Center
(DIC) on page 3-43.
H. Rear Window Washer/Wiper. See Windshield
Washer on page 3-10.
I. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See Instrument
Panel Brightness on page 3-17.
J. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-11.
K. Dome Lamp Override Button. See Dome Lamp
Override on page 3-17.
L. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-58.
M. Climate Controls. See Dual Automatic Climate
Control System on page 3-19.
N. Gear Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 2-24.
O. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-20.
P. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-27.
Q. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 3-18.
R. Cupholder. See Cupholder(s) on page 2-50.
S. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-50.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
Horn
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
To sound the horn, press the horn symbols on the
steering wheel pad.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
in the center of the
instrument panel.
Tilt Wheel
You should adjust the
steering wheel before
you drive. The tilt lever
is located to the left of the
steering column, under
the turn signal lever.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up
at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
3-6
You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs
more room when you enter and exit the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull
the lever toward you. Move the steering wheel to a
comfortable level, then release the lever to lock
the wheel in place.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn and
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
Lane-Change Signals on page 3-7.
• O Headlamps. See Headlamps on page 3-14.
• 23 Headlamp High/Low Beam-Changer. See
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.
• Flash-To-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass
on page 3-8.
• - Fog Lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 3-16.
• I Cruise Control. See Cruise Control on
page 3-11.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when you release it. The bottom of the outside
rearview mirrors may also be equipped with lane change
indicators.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows flash
more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may be burned
out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
3-7
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers
on page 5-98 and check for burned-out bulbs.
If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring
for the trailer lamps, a turn signal flasher is used.
With this flasher installed, the signal indicator will flash
even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check the
front and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make
sure they are working.
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn
signal lever to the off position.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low to high beam,
push the lever toward the instrument panel. To return
to low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever
toward you. Then release it.
3-8
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic
position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.
They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward
you. The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel
cluster will come on. Release the lever to return to
normal operation.
Windshield Wipers
x (Delay Adjustment):
Use this band to set the
length of the delay between wipes when using the delay
feature. The closer you move the band toward mist,
the longer the delay. The windshield wiper lever must
be in delay for this feature to work.
6 (Low Speed): Put the lever in this position for
slow, steady wiping cycles.
1 (High Speed):
The lever on the right side of the steering column
operates the windshield wipers.
7 (Mist):
Pull the lever down and release it for a
single wiping cycle. The lever will return to its original
position. For more cycles, hold the lever down before
releasing it.
9 (Off): Put the lever in this position to turn off the
wipers.
& (Delay):
Put the lever in this position to set a delay
between wipes. Turn the delay adjustment band to
set the length of the delay.
Put the lever in this position for
rapid wiping cycles.
If the windshield wipers are in use for about six seconds
while you are driving, the exterior lamps will come on
automatically if the exterior lamp control is in AUTO.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
gently loosen or thaw them. If the blades do become
damaged, install new blades or blade inserts. For more
information, see Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 5-53.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
3-9
Windshield Washer
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
L(Windshield Washer):
To spray washer fluid on the
windshield, press the windshield washer paddle. The
wipers will clear the window and then either stop
or return to your preset speed.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
3-10
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
This control is located to
the left of the steering
wheel on the instrument
panel.
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the control to either 1, 2,
or 3. For delayed wiping, turn the control to 1 or 2.
For steady wiping, turn the control to 3. To turn the
wiper off, turn the control to 0.
The headlamps must be on to be washed. If the
headlamps are off, only the front windshield will be
washed. See Windshield Washer on page 3-10 for
more information.
To wash the rear window, press the washer symbol
located in the center of the control.
Cruise Control
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the windshield washer. However, the rear window
washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer.
If you can wash your windshield but not your rear
window, check the fluid level.
9(Off): This position
turns the system off.
Headlamp Washer
Your vehicle may be equipped with a headlamp washer
system. The headlamp washers clear debris from the
headlamp lenses by soaking the lens with fluid, waiting
for about five seconds, then rinsing the loose debris
from the lenses.
The headlamp washers are located under the
headlamps. The headlamp washers activate for one
wash-wait-rinse cycle when the front windshield washer
button is pressed for the first time after your vehicle
is turned on. The headlamps washers then activate
automatically for one cycle after every four front
windshield washes.
R(On):
This position activates the system.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this symbol
to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a
previously set speed.
T(Set):
Press this button to set the speed.
3-11
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Some vehicles have
a cruise light on the
instrument panel cluster
that will come on when the
cruise control is engaged.
3-12
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired
speed and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. But you do not need
to reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you
can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to
resume/accelerate.
You will go right back up to your chosen speed and stay
there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, do
not hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
• Move the cruise switch from on to resume/
accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to the speed
you want, and then release the switch. To increase
your speed in very small amounts, move the switch
briefly to resume/accelerate. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
• Press in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time you do this, you will go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Press the set button at the end of the lever, then
release the button and the accelerator pedal. You will
now cruise at the higher speed. If the accelerator
pedal is held longer than 60 seconds, cruise control
will turn off.
3-13
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Erasing Speed Memory
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may want to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to
keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake
takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and do not use cruise control on
steep hills.
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Ending Cruise Control
To turn off the cruise control, do one of the following:
•
•
•
•
Headlamps
The exterior lamp control is located in the middle of the
turn signal/multifunction lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
O(Exterior Lamp Control):
Turn the control with this
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has the following four positions:
Step lightly on the brake pedal,
move the cruise control switch to off, or
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak® feature, cruise
control will turn off if road conditions cause
StabiliTrak® to activate.
• If the accelerator pedal is held longer than
60 seconds, cruise control will turn off.
The cruise control will turn off automatically if the
traction control system or StabiliTrak® system activate,
if your vehicle is equipped with either feature.
3-14
O (On/Off): Turn the control to this position to turn
off the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) and Automatic
Headlamps. Turning the control to this position again
turns the automatic lighting system back on. This feature
is not available for vehicles first sold in Canada.
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position to
put the headlamps in automatic mode. AUTO mode
will turn the exterior lamps on and off depending upon
how much light is available outside of the vehicle.
; (Parking Lamps):
Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps together with the
following:
•
•
•
•
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
5 (Headlamps):
Turn the control to this position to
turn on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
• The light sensor detects daytime light.
• The transmission is not in PARK (P).
When DRL are on, either your turn signal lamps or
headlamps will be on. If your vehicle is equipped with the
High Intensity Discharge (HID) lighting system option, the
DRL system will turn on your turn signal lamps. If your
vehicle is not equipped with HID, the DRL system will turn
on your headlamps at reduced brightness. The taillamps,
sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on. The instrument
panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the headlamps will
automatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Automatic Headlamp System
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL
can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but
they can be especially helpful in the short periods after
dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime running
lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
When it is dark enough outside, your Automatic
Headlamp System will turn on your headlamps at the
normal brightness along with other lamps such as the
taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the instrument
panel lights. The radio lights will also be on.
The DRL will activate when the following conditions
are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamps knob is in automatic
headlamp mode.
Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on the top
of the instrument panel. Be sure it is not covered or
the system will be on whenever the ignition is on.
The system may also turn on your lights when driving
through a parking garage, heavy overcast weather
or a tunnel. This is normal.
3-15
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and
nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
and the automatic headlamp systems, so that driving
under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not
affect the system. The DRL and automatic headlamp
system will only be affected when the light sensor sees a
change in lighting lasting longer than the delay.
Fog Lamps
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once you
leave the garage, it will take about one minute for the
automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is light
outside. During that delay, your instrument panel cluster
may not be as bright as usual. Make sure your instrument
panel brightness control is in the full bright position.
-: The band with this symbol is used to turn the fog
lamps on and off.
To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp system
off, start your vehicle and turn the headlamp switch to
the off position. The switch will automatically return
to the AUTO position. The automatic headlamp system
will stay off until you turn the switch to the off position
again as explained in “Headlamps”. See Headlamps on
page 3-14. This feature is not available for vehicles
first sold in Canada.
If equipped, the fog lamp control is located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty
conditions.
When the fog lamps are turned on, the parking lamps
also turn on. A message will also display on the
DIC when the fog lamps are turned on or off. See
Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-43.
• To turn the fog lamps on or off, turn the fog lamp
band on the lever up to the dot and release it.
The band will return to its original position.
• If you turn on the high-beam headlamps, the fog
lamps will turn off. They will turn back on again
when you switch back to low-beam headlamps.
When the Fog Lamps are turned on or off, a message
will appear on the Driver Information Center. See
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-47.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
3-16
Instrument Panel Brightness
Turn the knob to adjust the
instrument panel lights.
Turn the knob all the way
up to turn on the interior
lamps.
Dome Lamp Override
The dome override button
is located to the left of the
steering column on the
instrument panel.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps will come on when you open a door
unless the dome lamp override is pressed in.
You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the
instrument panel brightness control, located next to the
exterior lamps knob, all the way up to the top detente
position. In this position, the dome lamps will remain on
until they are turned off.
To turn the dome lamps off, press the button. The dome
lamps will remain off when a door is open. This will
override the illuminated entry feature unless you use your
remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the vehicle.
To return the lamps to automatic operation, press the
button again. The dome lamps will come on when
you open any door.
3-17
Entry Lighting
Battery Run-Down Protection
Your vehicle is equipped with entry lighting.
This feature shuts off the dome, courtesy and vanity
if they are left on for more than 20 minutes when
the ignition is off. This will keep your battery from
running down.
When any door is opened, the dome lamps will come
on as long as the dome override lamp override button
is not pressed in. When all the doors are closed,
the lamps will stay on for a short period of time and will
then turn off automatically. If you use your remote
keyless entry transmitter to unlock the vehicle, the
interior lights will come on for a short time whether or
not the dome lamp override is on.
Exit Lighting
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
you remove the key from the ignition. If the dome
override is on, these lights will stay on for a short period
of time and then will go out.
Reading Lamps
Press the indented part of the lenses on the reading
lamps located in the overhead console to turn them on
or off.
If the battery run-down protection shuts off the interior
lamps, it may be necessary to do one of the following to
return to normal operation:
• Shut off all lamps and close all doors.
• Turn the ignition key to RUN.
This feature will also turn off the parking lamps and
headlamps under most circumstances, if they are left on.
If you would like to turn them back on, turn the exterior
lamps knob.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
With the accessory power outlets, you can plug in
auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular
telephone or CB radio.
The outlet can accept electrical equipment rated at a
maximum of 20 Amps.
There are two outlets to the right of the cupholder on
the floor console.
3-18
To use the outlet, remove the cover. Replace the cover
when not in use.
Climate Controls
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adaptor fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on the accessory power outlets.
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating. Check
with your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with
the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle. When your vehicle
is first started and the climate control system is on, or if
the climate control system has been turned on, the
display will show the driver’s temperature setting for
five seconds. Then it will show the outside temperature.
3-19
9(Off): Press this button to turn off the entire climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle,
and will be directed to the floor. Press the AUTO button,
the mode button, the fan arrows, or either temperature
knob to turn the system on.
C (Mode): Press this button to manually select the air
delivery mode to the floor, instrument panel, or windshield
outlets. The system will stay in the selected mode until
the mode button is pressed again or the AUTO button is
pressed.
Driver’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn this knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the
temperature on the driver’s side of the vehicle. The
display will show the temperature setting decreasing or
increasing and an arrow pointing toward the driver. This
knob can also adjust the passenger’s side temperature
setting if the two are linked.
3-20
Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn this knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to manually raise or lower
the temperature on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
The display will show the temperature setting decreasing
or increasing and an arrow pointing toward the
passenger. The passenger’s temperature setting can be
set to match and link to the driver’s temperature setting
by pressing and holding the AUTO button for three
seconds. When adjusting the driver’s side temperature
setting, the passenger’s side temperature setting will
follow and both arrows will appear on the display. The
passenger’s side temperature setting also resets and
relinks to the driver’s side temperature setting if the
vehicle has been off for more than three hours.
Outside Air Temperature Display
A new outside temperature reading will be displayed if
the vehicle has been off for more than three hours. If the
vehicle has been off for less than three hours, the old
temperature reading may be displayed because
underhood heat is affecting the true outside temperature.
Underhood heat can also affect the outside temperature
while the engine is running. It may also take several
minutes of driving before the display updates to the
actual outside temperature.
Automatic Operation
Manual Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
active, the system will control the inside temperature,
the air delivery mode, and the fan speed.
To change the current setting, select one of the
following:
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning
operation and air outlet mode will be automatically
controlled. The air conditioning compressor will
run continuously when the outside temperature is
over approximately 40°F (4°C). The air inlet
will normally be set to outside air. If it’s hot outside,
the air inlet will automatically switch to recirculate
inside air to help quickly cool down your vehicle.
2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 72°F (22°C)
temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes
for the system to adjust. Turn the driver’s or
passenger’s side temperature knob to adjust the
temperature setting as necessary. If you choose the
temperature setting of 60°F (15°C), the system
will remain at the maximum cooling setting. If you
choose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C),
the system will remain at the maximum heat setting.
Choosing either maximum setting may not cause
the vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
w9x (Fan):
This button allows you to manually
adjust the fan speed. Press the up arrow to increase fan
speed and the down arrow to decrease fan speed.
The display will change to show you the selected fan
speed and the driver’s side temperature setting for
five seconds.
C (Mode): Press this button to manually change the
direction of the airflow in your vehicle. Keep pressing the
button until the desired mode appears on the display.
The display will change to show you the selected
air delivery mode and the driver’s temperature setting
for five seconds.
H(Vent):
This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
)(Bi-Level):
This mode directs approximately half of
the air to the instrument panel outlets, then directs
the remaining air to the floor outlets. A little air is
directed toward the windshield and the side window
outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and
warmer air to the floor outlets.
3-21
6(Floor):
This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets. Some air also comes out of the defroster
and side window outlets. The recirculation button cannot
be selected in floor mode.
@ (Recirculation):
Press this button to turn
recirculation mode on or off. When this button is
pressed, an indicator light in the button will also come
on to let you know that it is activated. Recirculation
mode is used to recirculate the air inside of your vehicle.
Use this mode to help prevent outside odors and/or
dust from entering your vehicle or to help cool the air
inside of your vehicle more quickly. Recirculation
mode can be used with vent and bi-level modes, but it
cannot be used with floor, defog or defrost modes.
Defog and defrost modes are described later in
this section.
If recirculation mode is selected with floor, defog, or
defrost modes, the indicator will flash three times and
then turn off indicating the selection is not available.
You may also notice that the air conditioning compressor
will run while in recirculation mode. This is normal
and will help to prevent fogging.
If the weather is cold and damp, the system may cause
the windows to fog while using recirculation mode. If the
windows do start to fog, select defog or defrost mode.
3-22
Recirculation mode, if selected, will be cleared when the
engine is turned off.
#A/C (Air Conditioning):
Press this button to
manually turn the air conditioning system on or off.
When the system is on, the system will automatically
begin to cool and dehumidify the air inside of your
vehicle. The air conditioning symbol will appear on the
display when the air conditioning is on and will turn
off when the air conditioning is off.
If you turn the air conditioning off while in front defrost
or defog mode, the air conditioning symbol will turn
off, however, the A/C compressor will remain on to help
de-humidify the air inside the vehicle. If one of the
other modes is selected the compressor will then turn
the A/C off until it is selected again or the AUTO button
is pressed.
You may notice a slight change in engine performance
when the air-conditioning compressor shuts off and
turns on again. This is normal.
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of moisture
condensing on the cool window glass. This can be
reduced if the climate control system is used properly.
You can use either defog or front defrost to clear
fog or frost from your windshield.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
-(Defog):
An indicator light in the button will come on to let you
know that the rear window defogger is activated.
Use this setting to clear the windows of fog
or moisture. This setting will deliver air to the floor
and windshield outlets.
0 (Front Defrost):
Press the front defrost button to
clear the windshield and side windows of frost or
fog quickly. The system will automatically control the fan
speed if you select defrost from AUTO mode. If the
outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or warmer, your air
conditioning compressor will automatically run to
help dehumidify the air and dry the windshield. Do not
drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
< (Rear):
Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately
10 minutes after the button is pressed. If you need
additional warming time, press the button again.
If equipped, your heated mirrors will also come on when
you press this button.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
3-23
Outlet Adjustment
Rear Climate Control System
Use the air outlets located in the center and on the
sides of your instrument panel to direct the airflow.
The lower buttons on the rear seat audio are used to
adjust the rear seat climate controls. The temperature of
the air coming through the rear outlets is determined
by the front passenger’s temperature setting.
Operation Tips
• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,
or any other obstruction, such as leaves. The
heater and defroster will work far better, reducing
the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
• When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, select
maximum blower speed for a few moments
before driving. This helps clear the intake ducts of
snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of
fogging the inside of your window.
• Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
• Adding outside equipment to the front of your
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, may affect the
performance of the heating and air conditioning
system. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
z9y (Fan) Press this button to adjust the fan
speed.
z\y (Mode) Press this button to change the
direction of airflow in the rear seat area to either vent,
bi-level or floor mode.
P (On/Off) Press this button to turn the rear climate
controls on or off.
The rear control will only turn on if the front is on and
not in defrost mode.
3-24
Climate Controls Personalization
Your vehicle is equipped with a Driver Information
Center (DIC). You can store and recall the climate
control settings for temperature, air delivery mode and
fan speed for two different drivers. The personal
choice settings recalled are determined by the
transmitter used to enter the vehicle. After the button
with the unlock symbol on a remote keyless entry
transmitter is pressed, the climate control will adjust to
the last settings of the identified driver. The settings
can also be changed by pressing one of the memory
buttons (1 or 2) located on the driver’s door. When
adjustments are made, the new settings are
automatically saved for the driver.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that may
be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some warning
lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let
you know they are working. If you are familiar with this
section, you should not be alarmed when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when there
is a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly — and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning
lights and gages. They are a big help.
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC) that
works along with the warning lights and gages. See
Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-43.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention
to your warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
3-25
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how fast
you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will need to know to drive safely and
economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
3-26
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply press the trip stem located
on the instrument panel cluster.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs
a new odometer installed. The new one will be set to the
correct mileage total of the old odometer.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply press the trip stem on the
instrument panel cluster.
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, the
new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the
old odometer.
Tachometer
The tachometer
displays the engine
speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
Your vehicle’s odometer works together with the Driver
Information Center (DIC). You can set a Trip A and
Trip B odometer. See “Trip Information” under DIC
Operation and Displays on page 3-44.
3-27
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
sound for several seconds to remind you and your
passengers to buckle your safety belts. The driver
safety belt light will also come on and stay on for
several seconds, then it will flash for several more.
You should buckle your seat belt.
This chime and light will
be repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder
Light
Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN or
START, a chime will sound for several seconds
to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt.
This would only occur if the passenger airbag is
enabled. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-61
for more information. The passenger safety belt light
will also come on and stay on for several seconds, then
it will flash for several more.
This chime and light will be
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the
light will come on.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will come on.
3-28
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensors, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the
airbag system, see Airbag System on page 1-51.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then the
light should go out. This
means the system is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your airbag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a
few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If
the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-29
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system,
Your rearview mirror has a passenger airbag status
indicator.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
to let you know the status of the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START, the
passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and
OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check.
3-30
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if
the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is failsafe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may
be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag readiness
light ever come on together, it means that
something may be wrong with the airbag
system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front passenger seat
may not have the protection of the frontal
airbag. See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 3-29.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-61
for more on this, including important safety information.
3-31
Charging System Light
Voltmeter Gage
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show you it is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system. It could indicate that
you have problems with a generator drive belt, or another
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. Driving
while this light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
3-32
United States
Canada
When your engine is not running, but the ignition is in
RUN, this gage shows your battery’s state of charge in
DC volts.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between the
low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating
range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left idling for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power
at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
Brake System Warning Light
You can only drive for a short time with the reading
in either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off
all unnecessary accessories.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on when you set your parking brake. The light
will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully.
If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it
means you have a brake problem. A chime may also
sound when the light comes on.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a
problem.
3-33
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-39.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for
service.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may stay on for
several seconds, that is
normal. A chime may also
sound when the light
comes on.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you are driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do
not have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you do not have anti-lock brakes
and there is a problem with your regular brakes. See
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-33 earlier in this
section.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come on
briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light
does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to
warn you if there is a problem.
3-34
StabiliTrak® Service Light
This light will come on
briefly when the engine is
started.
This light will come on if a problem is detected in the
StabiliTrak® system.
For more information see StabiliTrak® System on
page 4-9.
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
This warning light should
come on briefly when the
engine is started.
During most driving conditions, this light will not come
on. If the StabiliTrak® System is actively controlling the
stability and/or traction of the vehicle, this light will blink.
This is normal.
This light will come on if any portion of the system has
been manually turned off or a problem is detected
in the system.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Driver Information
Center, a message will appear also, see DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-47 and StabiliTrak® System
on page 4-9 for more information.
3-35
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer moves into the red area, the engine coolant
has overheated.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-27.
3-36
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The check engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to
assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any
malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as good,
and your engine may not run as smoothly. This could
lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by
your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may also
result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light does not come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
If the Light is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Reducing vehicle speed
Avoiding hard accelerations
Avoiding steep uphill grades
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
3-37
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install the
cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap will allow
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips
with the cap properly installed should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries
out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will cause
your engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You
may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when
you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the light to
turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
3-38
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has the
proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery
has run down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems during normal
driving. This may take several days of routine driving. If
you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass
the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness, your
dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Gage
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or other problems causing
low oil pressure.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
United States
Canada
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure
in psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine
is running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in
kPa (kilopascals).
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for changing engine oil.
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
3-39
Security Light
Reduced Engine Power Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn the
key toward START.
See PASS-Key® III Operation on page 2-18 for
additional information regarding the security light.
Cruise Control Light
If equipped, the cruise
control light appears
whenever you set your
cruise control.
See Cruise Control on page 3-11 for more information.
3-40
This light is displayed
when a noticeable
reduction in the vehicle’s
performance may occur.
The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed when the
reduced engine power light is on but acceleration and
speed may be reduced. The performance may be
reduced until the next time you drive your vehicle. If this
light stays on, see your dealer as soon as possible for
diagnosis and repair.
This light may also come on if there is a problem with
the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If this
happens, take the vehicle in for service as soon
as possible.
Highbeam On Light
This light will come on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
Malfunctions can be indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent, which may prevent serious
damage to the vehicle. This system is also designed to
assist your dealer in correctly diagnosing a malfunction.
Check Gages Warning Light
The check gages light will
come on briefly when you
are starting the engine.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.
Service All-Wheel Drive Light
This light should come on
briefly when you turn on
the ignition, as a check to
show you it is working.
If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving,
check your coolant temperature and engine oil pressure
gages to see if they are in the warning zones.
The service all-wheel drive light comes on to indicate
that there may be a problem with the drive system and
service is required.
3-41
Gate Ajar Light
Fuel Gage
If this light comes on, your
liftgate or liftglass is not
completely shut.
Close the liftgate or liftglass. Never drive with the liftgate
or liftglass even partially open.
United States
Canada
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about
how much fuel you have remaining.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before the
gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill
the tank.
3-42
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn off
the ignition.
Low Fuel Warning Light
The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly when
you are starting the engine.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) display is located
on the instrument panel cluster, below the speedometer.
The DIC buttons are located on the center of the
instrument panel, above the radio. The DIC can display
information such as the trip odometer, fuel economy,
customization features, and warning/status messages.
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See Fuel on
page 5-5.
Check Gas Cap Light
If equipped, this light will
come on if your gas cap is
not securely fastened.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-36 for more
information.
r (Fuel Information):
Press this button to display the
fuel range, fuel used, average fuel economy, and
engine oil life. See DIC Operation and Displays on
page 3-44 for more information.
3 (Trip Information): Press this button to display
the odometer, trip odometers, and timer. See DIC
Operation and Displays on page 3-44 for more
information.
3-43
| (Hazard): Press this button to turn the hazard
warning flashers on and off. See Hazard Warning
Flashers on page 3-6 for more information.
q (Customization):
Press this button to access the
vehicle settings menu and customize the personal
settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle Customization
on page 3-52 for more information.
r (Select):
Press this button to reset certain DIC
functions and set your customization settings.
Pressing any of the DIC buttons will acknowledge DIC
messages and clear them from the DIC display.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay the DIC will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine was turned off.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on the display. Pressing the trip stem on the instrument
panel cluster or any of the DIC buttons will acknowledge
any warning or service messages.
You should take any message that appears on the
display seriously and remember that clearing the
message will only make the message disappear,
not correct the problem.
3-44
The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by
pressing the four DIC buttons located on the center of the
instrument panel, above the radio. These buttons are fuel
information, trip information, customization, and select.
The button functions are detailed in the following pages.
Fuel Information Button
r (Fuel Information):
Press this button to scroll
through the fuel range, fuel used, average fuel economy,
and the engine oil life system.
Fuel Range: Press the fuel information button until
RANGE appears on the display. This mode shows the
remaining distance you can drive without refueling.
It is based on fuel economy and the fuel remaining in
the fuel tank. The display will show LOW if the fuel level
is low.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is
an average of recent driving conditions. As your driving
conditions change, this data is gradually updated. Fuel
range cannot be reset.
Fuel Used: Press the fuel information button until
FUEL USED appears on the display. This mode shows
the number of gallons or liters of fuel used since the
last reset of this menu item. To reset the fuel used
information, press and hold the select button for
one second while FUEL USED is displayed.
Average Fuel Economy: Press the fuel information
button until AVG. ECON appears on the display.
This mode shows how many miles per gallon (MPG),
kilometers per liter (km/L), or liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km) your vehicle is getting based on current and
past driving conditions.
Press and hold the select button for one second while
AVG. ECON is displayed to reset the average fuel
economy. Average fuel economy will then be calculated
starting from that point. If the average fuel economy is not
reset, it will be continually updated each time you drive.
Engine Oil Life System: Press the fuel information
button until ENGINE OIL LIFE appears on the display.
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the oil’s
remaining useful life. It will show 100% when the
system is reset after an oil change. It will alert you to
change your oil on a schedule consistent with your
driving conditions.
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. To reset the engine oil life system, see Engine
Oil Life System on page 5-19.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in
the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine
Oil on page 5-16 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4.
Trip Information Button
3 (Trip Information): Press this button to scroll
through the odometer, trip odometers, and timer.
Odometer: Press the trip information button until
ODOMETER appears on the display. This mode shows
the total distance the vehicle has been driven in either
miles or kilometers. Pressing the trip stem located on the
instrument panel cluster with the vehicle off will also
display the odometer.
Trip A: Press the trip information button until TRIP A
appears on the display. This mode shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP A in either
miles or kilometers.
3-45
Trip B: Press the trip information button until TRIP B
appears on the display. This mode shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP B in either
miles or kilometers.
To reset TRIP A or TRIP B information, press and hold
the select button for one second while in one of the
trip modes. This will reset the information for TRIP A or
TRIP B.
You can also reset the TRIP A or TRIP B while they are
displayed by pressing the trip stem. If you press and
hold the trip stem or the select button for four seconds,
the display will show the distance traveled since the
last ignition cycle for TRIP A or TRIP B.
Timer: The DIC can be used as a timer. Press the
select button while TIMER is displayed to start the timer.
The display will show the amount of time that has
passed since the timer was last reset, not including time
the ignition is off. Time will continue to be counted as
long as the ignition is on, even if another display is being
shown on the DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours,
59 minutes, and 59 seconds (99:59:59), after which
the display will roll back to zero.
3-46
To stop the counting of time, press the select button
briefly while TIMER is displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the select
button while TIMER is displayed.
Customization Button
q (Customization):
Press this button to access the
VEHICLE SETTINGS menu and customize the settings
to your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle Customization on
page 3-52 for more information.
Select Button
r (Select): Press the select button to reset certain
DIC functions, turn off or acknowledge messages
on the DIC display, and set your customization settings.
For example, this button will allow you to reset the
trip odometers, turn off the FUEL LEVEL LOW message,
and enables you to scroll through and select the
language in which the DIC information will appear.
DIC Warnings and Messages
CHANGE ENGINE OIL
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct the
condition. More than one message may appear at
one time. They will appear one after the other. Some
messages may not require immediate action, but
you should press the trip stem on the instrument panel
cluster or any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
that you received the message and to clear it from the
display. Some messages cannot be cleared from
the display because they are more urgent. These
messages require action before they can be removed
from the DIC display. The following are the possible
messages that can be displayed and some information
about them.
This message is displayed when the engine oil needs to
be changed and service is required for your vehicle.
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 and Engine
Oil on page 5-16 for more information. Also see Engine
Oil Life System on page 5-19 for information on how
to reset the message. This message will clear itself after
10 seconds until the next ignition cycle.
BATTERY NOT CHARGING
CURB VIEW ACTIVATED
If the battery is not charging during operation, this
message will appear on the DIC. Driving with this
problem could drain your battery. Have the electrical
system checked by your Saab dealer as soon as
possible. See Voltmeter Gage on page 3-32. Press the
select button to acknowledge this message and clear
it from the DIC display.
The CURB VIEW ACTIVATED message is displayed
when the passenger outside rearview mirror moves into
the curb view position. See Outside Curb View Assist
Mirror on page 2-42 for more information.
CHECK WASHER FLUID
If the washer fluid level is low, this message will appear
on the DIC. Adding washer fluid to the windshield
washer fluid reservoir will clear the message. See
Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-36. Press the select
button to acknowledge this message and clear it from
the DIC display.
3-47
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
FRONT FOG LAMPS OFF
If the driver’s door is not fully closed, this message will
appear on the display and you will hear a chime.
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if the
message still appears on the DIC. Press the select
button to acknowledge this message and clear it from
the DIC display.
If the fog lamps are turned off, this message will appear
on the DIC. The message will clear after 10 seconds.
If you turn on the high-beam headlamps, the fog lamps
will also turn off and this message will appear on the
DIC. The fog lamps will turn back on again when
you switch back to low-beam headlamps. See Fog
Lamps on page 3-16 and Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
on page 3-7 for more information.
ENGINE COOLANT HOT/ENGINE
OVERHEATED
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If an
overheat warning appears on the instrument panel
cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-27 for more information.
If the cooling system temperature gets hot, this message
will appear in the DIC and you will hear a chime. See
Engine Overheating on page 5-27 for the proper course
of action. This message will clear when the coolant
temperature drops to a safe operating temperature.
3-48
FRONT FOG LAMPS ON
If the fog lamps are turned on, this message will appear
on the DIC. The message will clear after 10 seconds. See
Fog Lamps on page 3-16 and Turn Signal/Multifunction
Lever on page 3-7 for more information.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
If the fuel level is low in the vehicle’s gas tank this
message will appear on the DIC and you will hear a
chime. Refuel as soon as possible. Press the select
button to acknowledge this message and clear it from
the DIC display. See Low Fuel Warning Light on
page 3-43, Filling the Tank on page 5-8, and Fuel on
page 5-5 for more information.
ICE POSSIBLE
OIL PRESSURE LOW/STOP ENGINE
If the outside temperature reaches a level where ice
could form on the roadway, this message may appear
on the DIC. If the temperature rises to a safe level,
the message will clear. Press the select button to
acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC
display.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for more information.
KEY FOB # BATTERY LOW
If a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low, this
message will appear on the DIC. The battery needs to be
replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement”
under Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-6. Press the select button to acknowledge this
message and clear it from the DIC display.
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR
If the driver’s side rear door is not fully closed this
message will appear on the display and you will hear a
chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if the
message still appears on the DIC. Press the select button
to acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC
display.
If low oil pressure levels occur, this message will
be displayed on the DIC. Stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible and do not operate it until the cause
of the low oil pressure has been corrected. Check your
oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced
by your Saab dealer. See Engine Oil on page 5-16.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
If the passenger’s door is not fully closed, this message
will appear on the display and you will hear a chime.
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if
the message still appears on the DIC. Press the select
button to acknowledge this message and clear it from
the DIC display.
3-49
REAR ACCESS OPEN
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
If the liftgate or liftglass is open while the ignition is in
RUN, this message will appear on the DIC and you will
hear a chime. Turn off the vehicle and check the
liftgate and liftglass. See Liftgate/Liftglass on page 2-13.
Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the
DIC display. Press the select button to acknowledge this
message and clear it from the DIC display.
If a problem occurs with the brake system this message
will appear on the DIC. If this message appears, stop
as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.
If the message is still displayed, or appears again when
you begin driving, the brake system needs service.
See your Saab dealer.
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR
SERVICE STABILITRAK
If the passenger’s side rear door is not fully closed this
message will appear on the display and you will hear a
chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if the
message still appears on the DIC. Press the select button
to acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC
display.
If you ever see the SERVICE STABILITRAK message,
it means there may be a problem with your StabiliTrak®
system. If you see this message, try to reset the
system by performing the following: stop; turn off the
engine; then start the engine again. If the SERVICE
STABILITRAK message still comes on, it means there
is a problem. You should see your Saab dealer for
service. The vehicle is safe to drive, however, you do
not have the benefit of StabiliTrak®, so reduce your
speed and drive accordingly. Press the select button to
acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC
display.
SERVICE AIR BAG
If there is a problem with the airbag system this
message will be displayed on the DIC. Have your
Saab dealer inspect the system for problems. See
Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-29 and Airbag
System on page 1-51 for more information. Press the
select button to acknowledge this message and clear it
from the DIC display.
3-50
STABILITRAK ACTIVE
The STABILITRAK ACTIVE message will be displayed
anytime the system activates to maintain vehicle
stability. Any combination of engine speed management,
brake traction control, and stability control will display
the STABILITRAK ACTIVE message on the DIC.
STABILITRAK NOT READY
The STABILITRAK NOT READY message may be
displayed if driving conditions delay system initialization.
This is normal. Once the system initializes, the
STABILITRAK NOT READY message will no longer
be displayed on the DIC.
STABILITRAK OFF
The STABILITRAK OFF message will be displayed when
you press the StabiliTrak® button for more than five
seconds or when stability control has been automatically
disabled. The StabiliTrak® button is located on the
transmission shift handle. To limit wheel spin and realize
the full benefits of the stability enhancement system, you
should normally leave StabiliTrak® on. However, you
should turn StabiliTrak® off if your vehicle gets stuck in
sand, mud, ice, or snow and you want to rock your
vehicle to attempt to free it, or if you are driving in
extreme off-road conditions and require more wheel spin.
See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
on page 4-32. To turn the StabiliTrak® system back on,
press the StabiliTrak® button again.
The message may be displayed if the brake system
warning light is on. See Brake System Warning Light
on page 3-33.
The message will turn off as soon as the conditions that
caused the message to be displayed are no longer
present.
TIGHTEN FUEL CAP
If the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly, this
message may appear on the DIC and a chime will sound.
Fully reinstall the fuel cap. See Filling the Tank on
page 5-8. The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose
or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. The DIC message will remain on until the
message is cancelled with the return button on the
steering wheel. The DIC message will also be cancelled
if the ignition is turned off.
The DIC message and the Service Engine Soon light
may come on again during a second trip if the fuel cap
is still not tightened properly. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 3-36 for more information.
3-51
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
The TRACTION CONTROL OFF message will be
displayed when you momentarily press the StabiliTrak®
button located on the transmission shift handle. In
this mode, stability control and the brake-traction control
are functional. Engine speed management will be
modified and the driven wheels can spin more freely.
For more details on this mode, see StabiliTrak® System
on page 4-9.
TURN SIGNAL ON
If a turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), this
message will appear on the display and you will hear a
chime. Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the
off position. Press the select button to acknowledge this
message and clear it from the DIC display.
DIC Vehicle Customization
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
allow you to program some features to one setting
based on your preference. All of the customizable
options listed may not be available on your vehicle.
Only the options available will be displayed on
your Driver Information Center (DIC).
3-52
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
To change feature preferences, make sure the ignition
is on and the vehicle is in PARK (P).
Press the customization button to scroll through the
available customizable options.
After pressing the customization button, VEHICLE
SETTINGS will momentarily display before going to a
customization option.
Lock Doors
Press the customization button until LOCK DOORS: IN
GEAR appears in the display. To select your preference
for automatic locking, press the select button while LOCK
DOORS: IN GEAR is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the
select button will scroll through the following choices:
LOCK DOORS: IN GEAR (default): The doors will lock
when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
LOCK DOORS: WITH SPEED: The doors will lock
when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for
three seconds.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks, see Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-10.
Unlock Doors
Press the customization button until UNLOCK DOORS:
IN PARK appears in the display. To select your
preference for automatic unlocking, press the select
button while UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK is displayed
on the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK (default): All of the doors
will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
UNLOCK DRIVER: IN PARK: The driver’s door will be
unlocked when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
UNLOCK DOORS: MANUALLY: The doors will not be
unlocked automatically.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks, see Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-10.
Lock Feedback
Press the customization button until LOCK FEEDBACK:
BOTH appears in the display. To select your preference
for the feedback you receive when locking the vehicle
with the remote keyless entry transmitter, press the
select button while LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with the
lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter
and the horn will chirp the second time you press the
lock button.
UNLOCK DOORS: KEY OUT: All of the doors
will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
3-53
LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when locking the vehicle.
LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the lock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the lock symbol
on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Unlock Feedback
Press the customization button until UNLOCK
FEEDBACK: LAMPS appears in the display. To select
your preference for the feedback you will receive when
unlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless entry
transmitter, press the select button while UNLOCK
FEEDBACK: LAMPS is displayed on the DIC. Pressing
the select button will scroll through the following choices:
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with
the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
3-54
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter and the
horn will chirp the second time you press the unlock
button.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when unlocking the vehicle.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Headlamp Delay
Press the customization button until HEADLAMP
DELAY: 10 SEC appears in the display. To select your
preference for how long the headlamps will stay on
when you turn off the vehicle, press the select button
while HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC is displayed on
the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
•
•
•
•
HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC (default)
HEADLAMP DELAY: 20 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 40 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 1 MIN
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 2 MIN
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 3 MIN
• HEADLAMP DELAY: OFF
The amount of time you choose will be the amount of
time that the headlamps stay on after you turn off
the vehicle. If you choose OFF, the headlamps will turn
off as soon as you turn off the vehicle.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Perimeter Lights
Press the customization button until PERIMETER
LIGHTS: ON appears in the display. To select your
preference for perimeter lighting, press the select button
while PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON (default): The headlamps
and back-up lamps will come on for 40 seconds, if
it is dark enough outside, when you unlock the vehicle
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
PERIMETER LIGHTS: OFF: The perimeter lights will
not come on when you unlock the vehicle with the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Easy Exit Seat
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SEAT:
OFF appears in the display. To select your preference
for seat position exit, press the select button while EASY
EXIT SEAT: OFF is displayed on the DIC. Pressing
the select button will scroll through the following choices:
EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF (default): No seat exit recall
will occur.
EASY EXIT SEAT: ON: The driver’s seat will move to
the exit position when the key is removed from the
ignition.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on seat position exit, see “Easy Exit Seat”
under Memory Seat on page 2-55.
3-55
Curb View
Alarm Warning
Press the customization button until CURB VIEW: OFF
appears in the display. To select your preference for
curb view, press the select button while CURB VIEW:
OFF is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button
will scroll through the following choices:
Press the customization button until ALARM WARNING:
BOTH appears in the display. To select your preference
for alarm warning, press the select button while
ALARM WARNING: BOTH is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
CURB VIEW: OFF (default): The passenger’s outside
mirror will not be tilted down when the vehicle is
shifted into REVERSE (R).
CURB VIEW: PASSENGER: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R).
When the vehicle is placed in PARK (P) or in any
forward gear, the mirror will return to the normal driving
position, following a short delay.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on tilt mirror in reverse, see Outside Curb
View Assist Mirror on page 2-42.
3-56
ALARM WARNING: BOTH (default): The headlamps
will flash and the horn will chirp when the alarm is
active.
ALARM WARNING: HORN: The horn will chirp when
the alarm is active.
ALARM WARNING: LAMPS: The headlamps will flash
when the alarm is active.
ALARM WARNING: OFF: There will be no alarm
warning on activation.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while your choice is displayed on
the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
For more information on alarm warning type, see
Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-16.
Language
Units
Press the customization button until LANGUAGE:
ENGLISH appears in the display. To select your
preference for display language, press the select button
while LANGUAGE: ENGLISH is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following languages:
Press the customization button until UNITS: U.S.
(ENGLISH) appears in the display. To select English or
metric, press the select button while UNITS: U.S.
(ENGLISH) is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select
button will scroll through the following choices:
• ENGLISH (default)
• FRANCAIS (French)
• ESPANOL (Spanish)
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
If you accidentally choose a language that you do not
want or understand, press and hold the customization
button and the trip information button at the same
time. The DIC will begin scrolling through the languages
in their particular language. English will be in English,
Francais will be in French, and Espanol will be in
Spanish. When you see the language that you would
like, release both buttons. The DIC will then display the
information in the language you chose.
• UNITS: U.S. (ENGLISH) (default)
• UNITS: METRIC (km/L)
• UNITS: METRIC (L/100 km)
If U.S. (ENGLISH) is chosen, all information will be
displayed in English units. For example, distance will be
displayed in miles (mi) and fuel economy in miles per
gallon (MPG). If METRIC (km/L) is chosen, all information
will be displayed in metric units. For example, distance
will be displayed in kilometers (km) and fuel economy in
kilometers per liter (km/L). If METRIC (L/100 km) is
chosen, all information will be displayed in metric units.
For example, distance will be displayed in kilometers (km)
and fuel economy in liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and exit out of the customizable options.
You can also scroll through the different languages
by pressing and holding the trip reset stem for
four seconds, as long as you are in the odometer mode.
3-57
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read
the pages following to familiarize yourself with its
features.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer
driving experience. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.
By taking a few moments to read this manual and
get familiar with your vehicle’s audio system, you can
use it with less effort, as well as take advantage of
its features. While your vehicle is parked, set up your
audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations,
setting the tone and adjusting the speakers. Then,
when driving conditions permit, you can tune to your
favorite stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls (if equipped).
3-58
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
driving. For more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 4-2. Get familiar with your vehicle’s audio
system so you can use it with less effort and take full
advantage of its features.
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls (if equipped).
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to your
vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player, CB
radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make sure
that it can be added by checking with your dealer.
Also, check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be added,
it is very important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of your
vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems, and even
damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may interfere
with the operation of sound equipment that has been
added.
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment
is added to your vehicle, the chimes may not
work. Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
installing it. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find
out what your audio system can do, and how to operate
all of its controls.
Setting the Time
Press and hold H until the correct hour appears on the
display. AM or PM will appear on the display (Radio with
CD (UpLevel, MP3, and Six-Disc CD)). Press and hold M
until the correct minute appears on the display. The time
can be set with the ignition on or off.
3-59
Radio with CD
Playing the Radio
P (Power/Volume):
Press this knob to turn the
system on and off.
Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume.
DISP (Display): When the ignition is turned off,
press this knob to display the time.
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP button while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
the 48 contiguous United States and in Canada
(if available). XM™ offers over 100 coast-to-coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk, and
children’s programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title
and artist name. A service fee is required in order to
receive the XM™ service. For more information,
contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
3-60
To change the default on the display, press the DISP
button until you see the display you want, then hold this
knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep
and the selected display will now be the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to make
up for road and wind noise as you drive.
The radio will go to a station, play for a few seconds,
then go on to the next station. Press either arrow again
or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. Each higher setting will
allow for more volume compensation at faster vehicle
speeds. Then as you drive, automatic volume increases
the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any
speed. The volume level should always sound the same
to you as you drive. NONE will appear on the display if
the radio cannot determine the vehicle speed. To turn
automatic volume off, press this button until AVOL OFF
appears on the display.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow for
more than four seconds. PSCN will appear on the display
and the radio will produce two beeps. The radio will go to
a preset station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next preset station. Press either arrow again or one of the
pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
e (Tune):
Turn this knob to select radio stations.
t SEEK u:
Press and release the right or the left
arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for more
than two seconds. SCAN will appear on the display
and the radio will produce one beep.
The radio will only seek and scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
4 (Information):
If the current station has a message,
the information symbol will appear on the display. Press
this button to see the message. The message may
display the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the information
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of this button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol will
disappear from the display until another new message is
received. The last message can be displayed by pressing
the information button. You can view the last message
until a new message is received or a different station is
tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station, No Info
will appear on the display.
3-61
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
e (Bass/Treble): Push and release this knob until
BASS or TREB appears on the display. Turn this knob to
increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass or
the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease the
treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To adjust the bass and the treble to the middle position,
while in bass or treble, push and hold the tone knob. The
radio will produce one beep.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the tone knob when no tone or
speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will appear
on the display and you will hear a beep.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock and classical.
The equalization one through seven options are included
only if your vehicle is equipped with the Bose® system.
Press the AUTO EQ button to select equalization
settings designed for equalization one through seven.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode, push
and release the tone knob until BASS and TREB
appears on the display.
3-62
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
e (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance between the
right and the left speakers, push and release this knob
until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to move
the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the speaker knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound
toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle position,
while in fade or balance, push the tone knob, then push it
again and hold it until you hear one beep.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the tone knob when no tone or
speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will appear
on the display and you will hear a beep.
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
(XM™ Satellite Radio Service Only)
To select and find a desired category perform the
following:
1. Press the CAT button to activate category select
mode. The current category will appear on the
display.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to take you to that category’s first
station.
4. To go to another station within that category and
the category is displayed, press either SEEK
arrow again. If CAT times out and is no longer on
the display, go back to Step 1.
5. Press CAT to exit category select mode or wait for
CAT to time out.
If the radio cannot find the desired category, NOT
FOUND will appear on the display and the radio will
return to the last station you were listening to.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for your vehicle and
it must be returned to your dealer for service.
LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take your vehicle
to your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer.
2. Turn the tune knob to select a category.
3-63
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signl
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicle
is moved into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading
Acquiring channel audio
(after four second delay)
The radio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavl
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-64
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM Lock
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in your vehicle may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with your dealer.
Radio ID
Radio ID label (channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Check XM
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
3-65
Playing a CD
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. If
you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first
press the eject button or the DISP knob.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD will start to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt to play
scratched or damaged CDs, you could damage the
CD player. When using the CD player, use only CDs
in good condition without any label, load one CD at a
time, and keep the CD player and the loading slot free
of foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
When the CD is inserted, READING and the CD symbol
will appear on display. As each new track starts to
play, the track number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
is soiled, see Care of Your CDs and DVDs on page 3-99
for more information.
3-66
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1 r (Previous): Press this pushbutton to reverse
within the track.
2 [ (Next): Press this pushbutton to fast forward
within the track.
3 N (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear a track
over again. RPT ON will appear on the display. The
current track will continue to repeat. Press this
pushbutton again to turn off repeat play. RPT OFF will
appear on the display.
4 y (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. Press this pushbutton
again to turn off random play. RDM OFF will appear on
the display.
t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current or the previous track. Press the right arrow to
go to the start of the next track. If a track is approximately
10 seconds into its song, press either the left or right
arrow twice to get to the previous or next track.
To scan tracks, press either arrow for more than
two seconds until you hear one beep and SCAN appears
on the display. The CD will search the previous or next
tracks at two seconds per track. Press either arrow to
stop scanning.
DISP (Display): Press this button to see how long the
current track has been playing. The elapsed time of the
track will appear on the display. To change the default on
the display, track or elapsed time, press this button until
you see the display you want, then hold the button for
two seconds. The radio will produce one beep and the
selected display will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
B (CD):
Press this button to play a CD when listening
to the radio. The CD symbol will appear on the display
when a CD is loaded.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ
to select an equalization setting while playing a CD.
The equalization will be set whenever a CD is played.
See “AUTO EQ” listed previously for more information. If
you select an EQ setting for your CD, it will be
activated each time you play a CD.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this
button is pressed first.
3-67
Using an MP3 CD
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an
MP3 disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually
better to burn the disc all at once.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and album
will be available for display by the radio when
recorded using ID3 tag version 1.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
• Make sure playlists have a.pls, or .m3u, or .rmp
extension, other file extensions may not work.
The player will be able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files.
Long file names, folder names, or playlist names may
use more disc memory space than necessary. To
conserve space on the disc, minimize the length of the
file, folder or playlist names. You can also play an
MP3 CD that was recorded using no file folders. The
system can support up to 11 folders in depth, though,
keep the depth of the folders to a minimum in order
to keep down the complexity and confusion in trying to
3-68
locate a particular folder during playback. If a CD
contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,
50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files the player will let
you access and navigate up to the maximum, but all
items over the maximum will be ignored.
Root Directory
The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
will be displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly
under the root directory will be accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) will always
be accessed before root folders or files.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player will
advance to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files and the empty folder
will not be displayed or numbered.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
will be located under the root folder. The next and
previous folder functions will have no function on a
CD that was recorded without folders or playlists.
When displaying the name of the folder the radio will
display ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files will be located under
the root folder. The folder down and the folder up
buttons will search playlists (Px) first and then go to the
root folder. When the radio displays the name of the
folder the radio will display ROOT.
Order of Play
Tracks will be played in the following order:
• Play will begin from the first track in the first playlist
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has been played, play will continue from the first
track of the first playlist.
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play
will begin from the first track under the root
directory. When all tracks from the root directory
have been played, play will continue from files
according to their numerical listing. After playing the
last track from the last folder, play will begin
again at the first track of the first folder or root
directory.
When play enters a new folder, the display will not
automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
See DISP later in this section for more information.
The new track name will appear on the display.
File System and Naming
The song name that will be displayed will be the song
name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song
name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio will
display the file name without the extension (such
as .mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
will be shortened. The display will not show parts
of words on the last page of text and the extension of
the file name will not be displayed.
Preprogrammed Playlists
You can access preprogrammed playlists which were
created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software, however, you will not have editing
capability. These playlists will be treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in, and READING will appear on
the display. The CD should begin playing and the CD
symbol will appear on the display. If you want to insert a
CD with the ignition off, first press the eject button or
the DISP knob.
3-69
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD will start to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
is soiled, see Care of Your CDs and DVDs on page 3-99
for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
3-70
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1 r (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse
within the same track. If this pushbutton is held
or pressed more than once, the player will continue
moving backward through the CD.
2 [ (Fast Forward): Press this pushbutton to fast
forward within the track. If this pushbutton is held
or pressed more than once, the player will continue
moving forward through the CD.
3 N (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear a track
over again. RPT On will appear on the display. The
current track will continue to repeat. Press this
pushbutton again to turn off repeat play. RPT OFF will
appear on the display.
4 y (Random): To random the tracks in the current
folder or playlist, press and release this pushbutton.
FLDR RDM will appear on the display. Once all of the
tracks in the current folder or playlist have been
played the system will move on to the next folder or
playlist and play all of the tracks in random order.
To random all the tracks on the CD, press and hold this
pushbutton for two seconds. You will hear a beep
and CD RDM will appear on the display. This feature
will not work with playlists.
When in random, pressing and releasing either SEEK
arrow will take you to the next or previous random track.
Press and release this pushbutton again to turn off
random play. NO RDM will appear on the display.
5 ! (Previous Folder): Press this pushbutton to go
to the first track in the previous folder. Pressing this
button while in folder random mode will take you to the
previous folder and random the tracks in that folder.
6 # (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to go to the
first track in the next folder. Pressing this button while
in folder random mode will take you to the next
folder and random the tracks in that folder.
t SEEK u:
Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the previous track. Press the right arrow to go to the
start of the next track. Press either arrow for more than
two seconds and SCAN will appear on display. The
radio will scan the previous or next tracks at two tracks
per second. Release the arrow to stop scanning and
to play the track.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch between
track mode, folder/playlist mode, and time of day mode.
The display will show only eight characters, but there
can be up to four pages of text. If there are more
than eight characters in the song, folder, or playlist
name, pressing this knob within two seconds will take
you to the next page of text. If there are no other pages
to be shown, pressing this knob within two seconds
will take you to the next display mode.
• Track mode will display the current track number
and the ID3 tag song name.
• Folder/playlist mode will display the current folder or
playlist number and the folder/playlist name.
• Time of day mode will display the time of day and
the ID3 tag song name.
To change the default on the display, press the DISP
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
this knob for two seconds. The radio will produce
one beep and the selected display will now be the
default.
3-71
4 (Information):
INFO will appear on the display
whenever a current track has ID3 tag information. Press
this button to display the artist name and album
contained in the tag. INFO will disappear from the
display when the information in the ID3 tag has finished.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
B (CD):
Press this button to play a CD when listening
to the radio. The CD symbol will appear on the display
when a CD is loaded.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ
to select an equalization setting while playing a CD.
The equalization will be set whenever a CD is played.
See “AUTO EQ” listed previously for more information. If
you select an EQ setting for your CD, it will be
activated each time you play a CD.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this
button is pressed first.
3-72
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• The format of the CD may not be compatible. See
“MP3 Format” earlier in this section.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
Radio with Six-Disc CD
Playing the Radio
P (Power):
Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume.
DISP (Display): When the ignition is turned off,
press this knob to display the time.
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
the 48 contiguous Untied States and in Canada
(if available). XM™ offers over 100 coast-to-coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk, and
children’s programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title
and artist name. A service fee is required in order to
receive the XM™ service. For more information,
contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
To change the default on the display, press the DISP
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
this knob for two seconds. The radio will produce
one beep and the selected display will now be the
default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to make
up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. Each higher setting
will allow for more volume compensation at faster
vehicle speeds. Then as you drive, automatic volume
increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise
at any speed. The volume level should always sound
the same to you as you drive.
3-73
NONE will appear on the display if the radio cannot
determine the vehicle speed. To turn automatic volume
off, press this button until AVOL OFF appears on
the display.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
e (Tune):
Turn this knob to select radio stations.
t SEEK u:
Press and release the right or the left
arrow to go to the next or to the previous station
and stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
Press and hold either arrow for more than two seconds.
SCAN will appear on the display and the radio will
produce one beep. The radio will go to a station, play
for a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
either arrow again or one of the pushbuttons to stop
scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-74
Press and hold this button until PSCN will appear on
the display and the radio will produce two beeps.
The radio will go to a preset station, play for a
few seconds, then go on to the next preset station.
Press either arrow again or one of the pushbuttons to
stop scanning presets.
The radio will only scan preset stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
4 (Information):
If the current station has a message,
the information symbol will appear on the display. Press
this button to see the message. The message may
display the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO button.
A new group of words will appear on the display after
every press of this button. Once the complete message
has been displayed, the information symbol will
disappear from the display until another new message is
received. The last message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button. You can view the last message until a
new message is received or a different station is tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station, No Info
will appear on the display.
1-6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this button to play
stations that are programmed on the radio preset
pushbuttons.
The radio will only seek preset stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
e (Bass/Treble):
Push and release this knob until
BASS or TREB appears on the display. Turn this knob
to increase or to decrease. The display will show
the bass or the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy,
decrease the treble.
To adjust the bass and the treble to the middle position,
while in bass or treble, push and hold the tone knob.
The radio will produce one beep.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the tone knob when no tone or
speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock and classical.
The equalization one through seven options are included
only if your vehicle is equipped with the Bose® system.
Press the AUTO EQ button to select equalization
settings designed for equalization one through seven.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode, push
and release the tone knob until BASS and TREB
appears on the display.
3-75
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
e (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance between the
right and the left speakers, push and release this knob
until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to move
the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the tone knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound
toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle position,
push the tone knob, then push it again and hold it until
you hear one beep.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, while in fade or balance, push and hold the tone
knob when no tone or speaker control is displayed. ALL
CENTERED will appear on the display and you will hear
a beep.
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
(XM™ Satellite Radio Service Only)
To select and find a desired category perform the
following:
1. Press the CAT button to activate category select
mode. The current category will appear on the
display.
2. Turn the tune knob to select a category.
3-76
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to take you to that category’s first
station.
4. To go to another station within that category and
the category is displayed, press either SEEK
arrow again. If CAT times out and is no longer
on the display, go back to Step 1.
5. Press CAT to exit category select mode or wait for
CAT to time out.
If the radio cannot find the desired category, NOT
FOUND will appear on the display and the radio will
return to the last station you were listening to.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for your vehicle and
it must be returned to your dealer for service.
LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take your vehicle
to your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signl
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicle
is moved into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading
Acquiring channel audio
(after four second delay)
The radio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavl
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-77
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM Lock
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in your vehicle may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with your dealer.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Check XM
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
3-78
Playing a CD
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, READING and the CD symbol
will appear on display. As each new track starts to
play, the track number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
is soiled, see Care of Your CDs and DVDs on page 3-99
for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD button.
3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right of the
slot, to turn green.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
3-79
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the indicator light, located
to the right of the slot, will begin to flash and
LOAD # will appear on the display.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
INSERT CD # will appear on the display, load
a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull the CD in.
Once the CD is loaded, the indicator light will begin
flashing again. Once the light stops flashing and
turns green, you can load another CD. The
CD player takes up to six CDs. Do not try to load
more than six.
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs,
press the LOAD button to cancel the loading function.
The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
each CD will appear on the display.
3-80
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the
display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD button,
then press the numbered pushbutton that corresponds
to the CD. A small bar will appear under the CD number
that is playing and the track number will appear on
the display.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to eject CD(s).
To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and
release this button.
To eject multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the CD eject button for five seconds.
You will hear a beep and the indicator light, located
to the right of the slot, will begin to flash and
EJECT ALL will appear on the display.
2. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
REMOVE CD # will appear on the display. The
CD will eject and can be removed.
Once the CD is removed, the indicator light will
begin flashing again and another CD will eject.
To stop ejecting the CDs, press the LOAD or the
eject button.
If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD will
be automatically pulled back into the player. If CD is
pushed back into the player, before the 25 second time
period is complete, the player will sense an error
and will try to eject the CD several times before
stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject a
CD after you have tried to push it in manually. The
player’s 25-second eject timer will reset at each press of
the eject button, causing the player to not eject the
CD until the 25-second time period has elapsed.
r (Reverse): Press this button to reverse within the
track.
[ (Fast Forward):
Press this button to fast forward
within the track.
N (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire CD
can be repeated.
To use repeat, do the following:
• To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
•
release the repeat button. RPT ON will appear on
the display. Press this button again to turn off repeat
play. RPT OFF will appear on the display.
To repeat the CD you are listening to, press and hold
the repeat button for two seconds. RPT ON will
appear on the display. Press this button again to turn
off repeat play. RPT OFF will appear on the display.
y (Random):
With random, you can listen to the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on one
CD or on all of the CDs. To use random, do one of
the following:
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in
random order, press and release the random
button. RANDOM ONE will appear on the display.
Press this button again to turn off random play.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
in random order, press and hold this button for
more than two seconds. You will hear a beep and
RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. Press this
button again to turn off random play.
3-81
t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either
arrow is held or pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
To scan one CD, press and hold either arrow for more
than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and
you hear a beep. The radio will go to the next track, play
for 10 seconds, then go on to the next track. Press either
arrow again, to stop scanning.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either arrow for
more than four seconds until CD SCAN appears on the
display and you hear a beep. Use this feature to listen to
10 seconds of the first track of each loaded CD. Press
either arrow again, to stop scanning.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. The elapsed time of the
track will appear on the display. To change the
default on the display, track or elapsed time, press this
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one
beep and the selected display will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
3-82
B (CD):
Press this button to play a CD when listening
to the radio. The CD symbol will appear on the display
when a CD is loaded.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ
to select an equalization setting while playing a CD.
The equalization will be set whenever a CD is played.
See “AUTO EQ” listed previously for more information.
If you select an EQ setting for your CD, it will be
activated each time you play a CD.
Using Song List Mode
R (Song List):
The six-disc CD changer has a
feature called song list. This feature is capable of saving
20 track selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least one
CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this section
for more information.
2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song list
mode. S-LIST should not appear on the display. If
S-LIST is present, press the song list button to
turn it off.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right
arrow to locate the track to be saved. the track will
begin to play.
4. Press and hold the song list button to save the
track into memory. When the song list button is
pressed, one beep will be heard immediately. After
two seconds of continuously pressing the song
list button, two beeps will sound to confirm the track
has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
S-LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try to save
more than 20 selections.
To play the song list, press the song list button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the
display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in
the order they were saved.
Seek through the song list by using the SEEK SCAN
arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will return to
the first saved track.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the following
steps:
3. Press either SEEK SCAN arrow to select the
desired track to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the song list button for two seconds.
When the song list button is pressed, one beep
will be heard immediately. After two seconds of
continuously pressing the song list button, two beeps
will be heard to confirm that the track has been
deleted.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added to the
song list, the track will be added to the end of the list.
To delete the entire song list, perform the following
steps:
1. turn the CD player on.
2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press and hold the song list button for more than
four seconds. One beep will be heard, followed by
two beeps after two seconds, and a final beep
will be heard after four seconds. S-LIST EMPTY will
appear on the display indicating the song list has
been deleted.
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3-83
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song
list again are added to the bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the song list button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed
from the display.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
CD Messages
Navigation/Radio System
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
3-84
The navigation system has built-in features intended to
minimize driver distraction. Technology alone, no matter
how advanced, can never replace your own judgment.
See the navigation system manual for some tips to help
you reduce distractions while driving.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system. The RSE system includes a DVD
player, a video display screen, two sets of wireless
headphones, and a remote control.
Parental Control
Headphones
This button is located behind the video screen. Press
this button while a DVD or CD is playing to freeze
the video and mute the audio. The video screen will
display Parental Control ON and the power indicator
light on the DVD player will flash. It will also disable all
other button operations from the remote control and
the DVD player, with the exception of the eject button.
Press this button again to restore operation of the
DVD player.
The RSE system includes two sets of wireless
headphones.
This button may also be used to turn the DVD player
power on and automatically resume play if the ignition is
in RUN, ACCESSORY, or if RAP is active.
Before You Drive
The RSE system is for rear seat passengers only.
The driver cannot safely view the video screen while
driving and should not try to do so.
Each set of headphones has an ON/OFF control. An
indicator light will illuminate on the headphones when
they are on. If the light does not illuminate, the batteries
may need to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement”
following for more information.
Each set of headphones has a volume knob. To adjust
the volume, adjust this knob.
The transmitters are located below the video display
screen. The headphones will shut off automatically
if they lose the signal from the system after about
four minutes to save battery power. The signal may
be lost if the system is turned off or if the headphones
are out of range of the transmitters.
When using the wired headphones, if the front seat
passengers play a CD in the Radio with Six-Disc CD
(if equipped) or use XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(if equipped), you will hear the audio for these sources,
instead of the DVD or CD that is currently playing
through the RSE.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs will not be covered by your warranty.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
3-85
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment door
located on the left side of the headphone earpiece.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Tighten the screw to close the compartment door.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period
of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
Stereo RCA Jacks
The RCA jacks are located behind the video screen.
The RCA jacks allow audio and video signals to
be connected from an auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system.
Standard RCA cables, not included, are needed
to connect the auxiliary device to the RCA jacks. The
yellow connector inputs video and the red and white
connectors input right and left audio. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for proper connection of the
auxiliary device.
3-86
To use the auxiliary inputs on the RSE system, connect
an external auxiliary device to the color-coded RCA
jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the
RSE system power on. If the RSE system had been
previously in the DVD player mode, pressing the SRCE
button on the faceplate or the remote control will
switch the RSE system between the auxiliary device
and the DVD player.
How to Change the Video Format when in
the Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC.
In some countries, the video format may be in the PAL
system. To change the video format, perform the
following:
1. Press the display menu button.
2. Press the down arrow button to highlight the Video
Format option.
3. Press the enter button to select Video Format.
4. Press the right or left arrow button to select
the desired video format.
5. Press the enter button to accept the change.
Audio Output
Video Screen
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may be
heard through the following possible sources:
The video screen is located in the overhead console.
To use the video screen, push forward on the release
latch and the screen will fold down. Adjust the screen’s
position as desired. When the video screen is not in
use, push it up into its latched position.
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the Rear Seat
Audio system (if equipped)
The RSE system will always transmit the audio signal by
infrared to the wireless headphones, if there is audio
available. See “Headphones” previously for more
information.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
vehicle speakers by using the radio. The RSE system
may be selected as an audio source on the radio if the
RSE system power is on. Once the RSE system is
selected as an audio source on the radio, adjust the
speaker volume on the radio, if necessary. If the RSE
system power is not on, the RSE system will not be an
available source on the radio. Refer to the radio
information for the radio that your vehicle has for more
information.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
wired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system
(if equipped). The RSE system may be selected as
an audio source on the rear seat audio system if
the RSE system power is on. Refer to Rear Seat Audio
(RSA) on page 3-96 for more information.
The DVD player and display will continue to operate
when the screen is in the up or the down position. The
video screen contains the transmitters for the wireless
headphones and the remote control. If the screen is in the
closed position, the signals will not be available for the
operation of the headphones or the remote control.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen,
as damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for more information.
DVD Player
The DVD player is located in the overhead console. The
DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the
DVD player and/or by the buttons on the remote control.
See “Remote Control” later in this section for more
information.
The DVD player power may be turned on when the
ignition is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
3-87
The RSE system DVD player is only compatible with
DVDs of the appropriate region code for the country that
the vehicle was sold in. The DVD region code is
printed on the jacket of most DVDs.
DVD Player Buttons (Without Sunroof)
Standard audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, Video CD and
Photo CD/CD-R media are fully supported by this DVD
player. DVD-R and DVD-RW media is supported if
formatted as DVD-Video. DVD+R and DVD+RW media
may or may not be supported by the DVD player.
The DVD player does not support DVD-RAM,
DVD-ROM, and DVD Audio media. An error message
will appear on the display if this type of media is inserted
into the DVD player.
When using the wired headphones, not included, if the
front seat passengers play a CD in the Radio with
Six-Disc CD (if equipped) or use XM™ Satellite Radio
Service (if equipped), you will hear the audio for
these sources, instead of the DVD or CD that is currently
playing through the RSE.
If an error message appears on the video screen, see
“DVD Messages” later in this section.
O(Power): Press this button to turn the RSE system
on and off. The power indicator light will illuminate
when the power is on.
X (Eject):
Press this button to eject a DVD or CD.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
c(Stop):
Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
s (Play/Pause):
Press this button to start play of a
DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is
playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue
the play of the DVD or CD.
3-88
y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons to
move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making
a selection press the enter button. This button only
operates when playing a DVD.
DVD Player Buttons (With Sunroof)
z (Set-up Menu):
Press this button to adjust the
color, tint, brightness, contrast, display mode, and
dynamic range compression. The dynamic range
compression feature can be used to reduce loud audio
and increase low audio produced by some DVDs.
To change a feature back to the factory default setting,
press this button to display the feature, then press
and hold this button. The default setting will appear on
the display.
While playing an Audio or DVD disc, press and hold this
button to display and to remove the track and time
information.
s (Play/Pause):
Press this button to start play of a
DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is
playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue
the play of the DVD or CD.
c / X (Stop/Eject):
Press this button to stop
playing, rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press
this button twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
Press and hold this button for more than two seconds to
eject a DVD or CD.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choices
that are highlighted in any menu.
3-89
Playing a Disc
Ejecting a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc with the label side
up into the loading slot. The DVD player will continue
loading the disc and the player will automatically start, if
the vehicle is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or when RAP is
active.
Press the eject button on the DVD player faceplate to
eject the disc. There is not an eject button on the remote
control.
If a disc is already in the player, press the play/pause
button on the DVD player faceplate or on the remote
control.
Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or skipping of
the copyright information or the previews. Some
DVDs will begin playing after the previews have finished.
If the DVD does not begin to play the main title, refer
to the on-screen instructions.
Stopping and Resuming Playback
To stop playing a disc, press and release the stop
button on the DVD player faceplate or the remote
control.
To resume playback, press the play/pause button on
the DVD player faceplate or the remote control.
The movie should resume play from where it was last
stopped, if the disc has not been ejected and the
stop button has not been pressed twice. If the disc has
been ejected or if the stop button has been pressed
twice, the disc will resume play at the beginning.
3-90
If a disc is ejected from the player, but is not removed,
the DVD player will reload the disc after a short
period of time. The disc will be stored in the DVD player.
The DVD player will not resume play of the disc
automatically.
Remote Control
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window below the video screen and press the desired
button. Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the
ability of the RSE system to receive signals from the
remote control. If the remote control does not seem to
be working, the batteries may need to be replaced.
See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.
Objects blocking the line of sight may also affect the
function of the remote control.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight may damage it, and the repairs
will not be covered by your warranty. Keep the
remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
To extend the life of the batteries, the remote control
does not have a press and hold feature.
Remote Control Buttons
z (Set-up Menu):
Press this button to adjust the color,
tint, brightness, contrast, display mode, and dynamic
range compression. The dynamic range compression
feature can be used to reduce loud audio and increase
low audio produced by some DVDs.
e (Audio):
Press this button to display a menu that
will only appear when a DVD is being played. The format
and content of this function will vary for each disc.
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast reverse
the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing, press this button
again. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD player
on and off.
v (Title):
Press this button to return the DVD to the
main menu of the DVD.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
t (Previous Track/Chapter):
Press this button to
return to the start of the current track or chapter. Press
this button again to return to the previous track or
chapter. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
3-91
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides you with the capability of direct chapter,
title, and track number selection.
}10 (Double Digit Entries):
Press this button to
select chapter, title, and track numbers greater than 9.
Press this button before inputting the number.
\ (Clear):
Press this button within three seconds after
inputting a number to clear the number(s).
P (Illumination):
Press this button to turn the remote
control backlight on. The backlight will time out after
about 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed while
the backlight is on.
y (Main DVD Menu):
Press this button to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons to
move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making
a selection press the enter button. This button only
operates when playing a DVD.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choices
that are highlighted in any menu.
q (Return):
Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu. This
button will operate only when a DVD is playing and a
menu is active.
3-92
| (Camera Angle):
Press this button to change
camera angles on DVDs that have this feature when a
DVD is playing. The format and content of this
function will vary for each disc.
{ (Subtitle):
Press this button to turn on subtitles and
to move through subtitle options when a DVD is playing.
The format and content of this function will vary for
each disc.
[ (Fast Forward):
Press this button to fast forward
the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding, press this
button again. This button may not work when the DVD
is playing the copyright information or the previews.
s (Play/Pause):
Press this button to start play of a
DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is
playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue
the play of the DVD or CD.
When the DVD is playing, press the pause button then
press the fast forward button. The DVD will continue
playing in a slow play mode. To cancel slow play mode,
press the play/pause button.
u (Next Track/Chapter):
Press this button to advance
to the beginning of the next track or chapter. This
button may not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Remove the battery compartment door located on
the bottom of the remote control.
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Close the battery door securely.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
Problem
No power.
Disc will not play.
Recommended Action
The ignition might not be
in on or accessory.
The parental control button
might have been turned
on. The power indicator
light will flash.
The system might be off.
The parental control button
might have been turned
on. The power indicator
light will flash.
The system might be in
auxiliary mode.
The disc is upside down or
is not compatible.
Problem
The picture does not fill the
screen. There are black
borders on the top and
bottom or on both sides or
it looks stretched out.
The disc was ejected, but
it was pulled back into the
DVD player.
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
The language in the audio
or on the screen is wrong.
Recommended Action
Check the display
mode settings in the
display menu.
The disc is being stored in
the DVD player. Press the
eject button again to eject
the disc.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
Change the Video Format
to PAL or NTSC. See
“Stereo RCA Jacks”
previously for how to
change the video format.
Check the audio or
language selection in the
main DVD menu.
3-93
Problem
The remote control does
not work.
Recommended Action
Check to make sure there
is no obstruction between
the remote control and the
transmitter window.
Check the batteries to
make sure they are not
dead or installed
incorrectly.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
After stopping the player, I If the stop button was
push Play but sometimes pressed one time, the
the DVD starts where I
DVD player will resume
left off and sometimes at playing where the DVD
the beginning.
was stopped. If the stop
button was pressed two
times the DVD player will
begin to play from the
beginning of the DVD.
3-94
Problem
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Recommended Action
Check that the DVD
player is in the auxiliary
source mode.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
My disc is stuck in the
Turn the DVD power off,
player. The Load/Eject
then on, then press the
button does not work.
load/eject button on the
DVD player.
Do not attempt to forcibly
remove the disc from the
DVD player. This could
permanently damage the
disc and DVD player.
Sometimes the wireless
Check for obstructions,
headphone audio cuts out low batteries, reception
or buzzes.
range, and interference
from cellular telephone
towers or by using your
cellular telephone in the
vehicle.
Check that the
headphones are facing
the front of the vehicle.
Problem
I lost the remote and/or
the headphones.
The DVD is playing, but
there is no picture or
sound.
The audio/video skips or
jumps.
Recommended Action
See your dealer for
assistance.
Check that the DVD
player is in DVD mode.
The DVD or CD could be
dirty, scratched, or
damaged.
The audio from the radio The RSE is working
correctly.
for the Radio with
Use the wireless
Six-Disc CD and XM™
has taken over the audio headphones or have the
from the DVD or CD when front seat passengers
using the wired
listen to another audio
headphones.
source.
DVD Messages
The following errors may be displayed on the video
screen:
Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed if a
disc is inserted upside down, if the disc is not readable,
or if the format is not compatible with the DVD player.
Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed if the
disc is not properly loaded or ejected.
Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed if the
DVD player cannot play the disc. Scratched or
damaged discs will cause this error.
Region Code Error: This message will be displayed if
the region code of the DVD is not compatible with the
region code of the DVD player.
No Disc: This message will be displayed if any of the
buttons on the DVD faceplate or remote control are
pressed and no disc is present in the DVD player.
DVD Distortion
There may be an experience with audio distortion in the
wireless headphones when operating cellular phones,
scanners, CB radios, Global Positioning Systems (GPS)*,
two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
* Excludes the OnStar® System.
Cleaning the Video Screen
Pour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean cloth
and gently wipe the video screen. Do not spray
directly onto the screen and do not press too hard or
too long on the video screen.
3-95
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
This feature allows rear seat passengers to select and
listen to any of the available radio sources: AM/FM,
XM, CD, or DVD. However, a rear seat passenger
cannot control a source selected on the radio by
someone in the front of the vehicle. For example, the
RSA cannot be used to change CD tracks if the radio is
set to CD. Also, if the radio is switched to a source
the RSA has control of, sound will not be lost, but the
RSA will lose control of that sourse.
Rear seat passengers always have control of the
volume for each set of headphones.
The RSA will run when the radio is off if the ignition key
is positioned in the power mode, see Ignition Positions
on page 2-20 in this manual.
3-96
P (Power):
Press this button to turn the RSA on or
off. The rear speakers are muted when the power
is turned on.
u (Volume): The left-hand knob controls the
headphone outlet on the left and the right-hand knob
controls the headphone outlet on the right. Turn
either knob clockwise to increase the volume and
counterclockwise to decrease the volume.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to select an audio
source: AM/FM, XM, CD, or DVD. The inactive CD,
or DVD will remain safely inside the radio for future
listening. There are sources that are internal to the radio,
such as AM/FM, and CD and other sources to radio
that are external, such as XM™, DVD, and OnStar®. If
an external source has been selected, the rear seat
passengers cannot select a different external source.
When a CD is playing, press the SEEK button to go to
the next track on the CD. This function is inactive if
the front seat passengers are listening to a CD.
SEEK: Press this button to go to the next station or CD
track and stay there. The display will show the selection.
This function is inactive if the radio is set to the same
source.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
To scan preset radio stations, press and hold the SEEK
button for two seconds and the radio will go to the
next preset station. Hold this button down and the radio
will continue to go through all available preset stations.
This function is inactive if the front seat passengers
are listening to the radio.
When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD player, press and
hold the SEEK button for two seconds to go you to the
next CD, if multiple CDs are loaded. This function is
inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to a CD.
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it
will not operate and LOCKED will appear on the display.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operate
if stolen.
3-97
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
g (OnStar®/Mute): If your vehicle has OnStar, press
this button to interact with the OnStar system. See
the OnStar® System on page 2-43 in this manual for
more information.
If your vehicle does not have OnStar, press this button
to mute the system. Press it again, or any other
radio button, to turn on the sound.
NXT (Next): Press this button to play a station you
have programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.
The radio will only seek preset stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include the following:
When a CD is playing in the CD changer, press this
button to go to the next available CD, if multiple CDs
are loaded.
Press the forward or the back arrow to go
to the next or to the previous radio station and stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
+ SRC − (Source): Press plus (+) or the minus (−)
button to switch between FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2 (if equipped), or a CD. If a CD is loaded the CD
symbol will appear on the display.
When a CD is playing, press the forward or the back
arrow to fast forward or reverse.
+ VOL − (Volume): Press the plus (+) or the (−) button
to increase or to decrease the volume.
u SEEK t:
3-98
Radio Reception
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
You may experience frequency interference and static
during normal radio reception if items such as cellphone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power
outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item
from the accessory power outlet.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada (if available). Just as with FM, tall
buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out. In addition,
traveling or standing under heavy foliage, bridges,
garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the XM™ signal
for a period of time. The radio may display NO SIGNAL to
indicate interference.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations will boost the power
levels during the day, and then reduce these levels during
the night. Static can also occur when things like storms
and power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on your radio.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals will
reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out.
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the bottom
surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will
not play properly or not at all. If the surface of a CD is
soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft
cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process starts
from the center to the edge.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it;
this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by
grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.
3-99
Care of the CD and DVD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, replace it.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the antenna base located on the hood of
the vehicle. If tightening is required, tighten by hand.
3-100
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-3
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5
Braking .........................................................4-6
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-7
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-8
Limited-Slip Rear Axle .....................................4-8
StabiliTrak® System ........................................4-9
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .......................4-13
Steering ......................................................4-14
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-16
Passing .......................................................4-16
Loss of Control .............................................4-18
Off-Road Driving ...........................................4-19
Driving at Night ............................................4-19
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-20
City Driving ..................................................4-23
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-24
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-25
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-25
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-26
Winter Driving ..............................................4-28
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice or Snow ......................................4-32
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-32
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-33
Towing ..........................................................4-39
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-39
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-39
Electronically Controlled Air Suspension
System ....................................................4-39
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-41
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-8.
4-2
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready for
anything.” On city streets, rural roads, or
expressways, it means “Always expect the
unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other
drivers are going to be careless and make
mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and be
ready. Rear-end collisions are about the most
preventable of accidents. Yet they are common.
Allow enough following distance. Defensive
driving requires that a driver concentrate on the
driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task makes proper defensive driving
more difficult and can even cause a collision,
with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to help do
these things, or pull off the road in a safe place
to do them. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving
is a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety
problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then
drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if
someone plans to drive? It is a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, more than 16,000 annual
motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people
injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it is
against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological, and
developmental reasons for these laws.
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
According to the American Medical Association, a
180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about
0.06 percent. The person would reach the same BAC by
drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or
three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of
liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
4-3
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The BAC
limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is
0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if the
same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces or
90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s BAC
would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes
food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat
lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have
a lower relative percentage of body water than men.
Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
man of her same body weight will when each has the
same number of drinks.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of
this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level
of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness,
and judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in
a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering, and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it is
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control of
your vehicle.
Adding non-Saab accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications on
page 5-3.
4-5
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-33.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up
your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a second.
But that is only an average. It might be less with one
driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination,
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and
frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second, a
vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet
(20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,
so keeping enough space between your vehicle and
others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, or
icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you
do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic
and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate
a lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking
and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine stops,
you will still have some power brake assist. But you will
use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up,
it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be
harder to push.
Adding non-Saab accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications on
page 5-3.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away, your
anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may hear a
momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going
on. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-34.
Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem,
both the brake and ABS warning lights will come on
accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights and
chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on
until the problem is repaired. See your dealer for service.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You
slam on the brakes and continue braking. Here is
what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at
both rear wheels.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake
pressure faster than any driver could. The computer
is programmed to make the most of available tire
and road conditions. This can help you steer around
the obstacle while braking hard.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you will not have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel the
brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but this
is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock brakes, you can steer and brake at the
same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
4-8
Your vehicle may have this feature. A limited-slip rear
axle can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice,
sand or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the
time, but when one of the rear wheels has no traction
and the other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
traction to move the vehicle.
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) which combines antilock
brake, traction and stability control systems and helps
the driver maintain directional control of the vehicle
in most driving conditions.
Traction control activates when the controller senses
wheel spin. StabiliTrak® will selectively apply the brakes
and reduce engine torque to help regain traction.
Stability control activates when the controller senses
a discrepancy between your intended path and the
direction the vehicle is travelling. StabiliTrak® selectively
applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle’s
brakes to help guide the vehicle in the direction which
you are steering.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive away,
the system performs several diagnostic checks to insure
there are no problems. You may hear or feel the system
working. This is normal and does not mean there is a
problem with your vehicle. If driving conditions delay
system initialization, the STABILITRAK NOT READY
message may be displayed. If this is the case, your
vehicle does not need servicing.
For more information on the stability messages, see
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-47.
When the StabiliTrak®
system is both on and
actively controlling the
stability of the vehicle,
the StabiliTrak® light will
blink for the duration of
the event.
You may also feel or hear the system working. This is
normal.
The StabiliTrak® disable
button is located on the
transmission shift handle.
The StabiliTrak® system has three modes of operation:
STABILITRAK ON, TRACTION CONTROL OFF, and
STABILITRAK OFF.
STABILITRAK ON -The vehicle will default to
STABILITRAK ON every time the driver starts the
vehicle. The StabiliTrak® light will be off and no DIC
messages will be displayed.
4-9
TRACTION CONTROL OFF - The driver can modify
the engine speed management system by momentarily
pressing the StabiliTrak® button on the transmission
shift handle. The StabiliTrak® light will come on and
TRACTION CONTROL OFF will be displayed. For
vehicles without a DIC, the StabiliTrak® indicator light
will come on. Momentarily pressing the StabiliTrak®
button again will return the system to the STABILITRAK
ON mode.
STABILITRAK OFF - The driver can turn off StabiliTrak®
by pressing the StabiliTrak® button for more than
five seconds. The StabiliTrak® light will come on and
STABILITRAK OFF will be displayed. For vehicles
without a DIC, the StabiliTrak® indicator light will come
on. Momentarily pressing the StabiliTrak® button again
will return the system to the STABILITRAK ON mode.
See StabiliTrak® Off below for more information.
4-10
Traction Control Off
In this mode, stability control and brake-traction control
are functional. Engine speed management will be
modified and the driven wheels can spin more freely.
This can cause the brake-traction control to activate more
frequently. If the controller detects excessive wheel spin
in this mode, the StabiliTrak® indicator light may blink and
the STABILITRAK ACTIVE message may be displayed
to warn the driver that damage may occur to the
transfer case.
StabiliTrak® Off
In this mode, both stability control and part of the
traction control system are disabled. Your vehicle will
still have brake-traction control, but will not be able
to use the engine speed management system. You may
still hear system noises as a result of the brake-traction
control coming on. If the controller detects excessive
wheel spin in this mode, the StabiliTrak® indicator light
may blink and the STABILITRAK ACTIVE message
may be displayed to warn the driver that damage may
occur to the transfer case.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the
system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you may want to “rock” your vehicle in an
attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the
system when driving in extreme off-road conditions where
high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck
in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-32 for more
information.
The following chart describes the StabiliTrak® system
events and the corresponding messages and lights that
will be displayed on the instrument panel cluster.
4-11
Vehicles with a DIC
StabiliTrak®
DIC Message
Indicator Light
4-12
Vehicles without a DIC
StabiliTrak®
StabiliTrak®
Indicator Light
Service Light
Off
None
Off
Off
Solid
Traction Control Off
Solid
Off
Solid
StabiliTrak® Off
Solid
Off
Blinking
StabiliTrak® Active
Blinking
Off
Solid
Service StabiliTrak®
Solid
Solid
Solid
StabiliTrak®
Not Ready
Solid
Off
Event
StabiliTrak® On
mode (System is fully
enabled, but is not
actively controlling
vehicle stability).
Traction Control
Off Mode
StabiliTrak® Off
Mode (StabiliTrak®
indicator light
will flash when
system first enters
this mode).
StabiliTrak® system
activates using
engine speed
management, brake
traction control,
and/or stability
control.
StabiliTrak® system
is disabled due to a
system fault.
StabiliTrak® system
is disabled due to a
failure to initialize.
Notice: If the StabiliTrak® light comes on due to
heavy braking and/or because the traction control
system has been continuously active, do not allow
the wheel(s) of one axle to spin excessively. If you
do, you may be causing damage to the transfer case.
This could lead to costly repairs not covered by your
warranty.
Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin
excessively while the StabiliTrak®, ABS and brake
warning lights and the SERVICE STABILITRAK
message are displayed, you could damage the
transfer case. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Reduce engine power and do not spin
the wheel(s) excessively while these lights and this
message are displayed.
®
StabiliTrak may activate on dry or rough roads or under
conditions such as heavy acceleration while turning or
abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the transmission. When this
happens, you may notice a reduction in acceleration, or
may hear a noise or vibration. This is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the StabiliTrak® light will blink, and the
cruise control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow, you may re-engage the cruise control.
See Cruise Control on page 3-11.
StabiliTrak® will turn off automatically if a problem is
detected in the system. The StabiliTrak® light will come
on and SERVICE STABILITRAK will be displayed on
the DIC. For vehicles without a DIC, the StabiliTrak®
light and the StabiliTrak® service light will both come on.
If the SERVICE STABILITRAK message (or StabiliTrak®
service light) does not clear itself after restarting the
vehicle, you should see your dealer for service.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3 for more information.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
Your vehicle has this feature. There is no lever or switch
to engage or disengage the front axle. It is fully automatic
and adjusts as needed for road conditions. Your vehicle
has an active transfer case allowing two-wheel-drive
operation on dry roads. The transfer case will shift
automatically into all-wheel drive on slippery surfaces.
You may feel an extra shift when the all-wheel drive
engages.
4-13
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer
but it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject
to the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you
turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia will
keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you
have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you will
understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle
at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you
are in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
4-14
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden
acceleration can demand too much of those places. You
can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up
on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust
your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are based on
good weather and road conditions. Under less favorable
conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-Saab accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications on
page 5-3.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the
time for evasive action — steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer
around the problem, to the left or right depending on the
space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn
it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the
object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-15
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides and
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn
until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then
turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
4-16
to crossroads for situations that might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a
better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken
center line usually indicates it is all right to pass,
providing the road ahead is clear. Never cross a
solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid
line, even if the road seems empty of approaching
traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass
while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,
following too closely reduces your area of vision,
especially if you are following a larger vehicle. Also,
you will not have adequate space if the vehicle
ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will
have a running start that more than makes up for
the distance you would lose by dropping back. And
if something happens to cause you to cancel your
pass, you need only slow down and drop back again
and wait for another opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. Remember that
your passenger side outside mirror is convex. The
vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away
from you than it really is.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next
vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
4-17
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to
slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
4-18
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer
and vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear. Any
sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. You may
not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is
skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to make
a mirrored surface — and slow down when you have
any doubt.
Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Off-Road Driving
Your vehicle does not have features like added ground
clearance, special underbody shielding, and a transfer
case low gear range, things that are necessary for
extended or severe off-road service. You should not
drive off-road unless you are on a level, solid surface.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare
from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so much road
ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you are driving,
do not wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on
glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot of things
invisible.
4-19
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When you
are faced with severe glare, as from a driver who does
not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed
headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into
the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and are
not even aware of it.
4-20
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a
wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on dry
roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread left, you
will get even less traction. It is always wise to go slower
and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving.
The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes
are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road, and even
people walking.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before
you hit them.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer fluid reservoir filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas
on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start
to separate from the inserts.
Hydroplaning
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles, or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’s
surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
4-21
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle
can be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller
vehicle. If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
4-22
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-56.
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an
unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-24.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light
is there because the corner is busy enough to need
it. When a light turns green, and just before you start
to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-23
Freeway Driving
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up
with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same speed
most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or too-slow
driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on
a freeway as a passing lane.
4-24
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend
with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower. Stay in
the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit,
do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up.
Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance at
higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going
slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after a day’s
work — do not plan to make too many miles that first part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you
can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you will find experienced and able service experts in
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated
to the recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a short
time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do not let it
happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road
in less than a second, and you could crash and be
injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to
the sides. Check your mirrors and your instruments
frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service,
or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise,
or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway
as an emergency.
4-25
Hill and Mountain Roads
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can
make your trips safer and more enjoyable.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transmission. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let
your engine assist your brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
4-26
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always have
your engine running and your vehicle in gear
when you go downhill.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important thing
to know is this: let your engine do some of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could
be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an
accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
of special problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area, or
winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate
action.
4-27
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth, and
reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving
under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a
piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to help
provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items
in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You will
have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be very
careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-56.
4-28
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Your Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, you will want
to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on
page 4-7.
• Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can
be even more trouble because it may offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can
get there.
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such as
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass may remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of
you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.
4-29
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and
your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you
have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats — anything you can wrap around yourself
or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-30
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see
it or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base
of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
your exhaust pipe. And check around again
from time to time to be sure snow does not
collect there.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all
the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and
repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from
the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel
as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out
of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
4-31
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to spin
your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking can
help you get out when you are stuck, but you must use
caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transmission or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little
as possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
4-32
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts
of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For more information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-72.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear
the area around your front wheels. Then shift back and
forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the
accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. By
slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse
directions, you will cause a rocking motion that may free
your vehicle. If that does not get you out after a few tries,
you may need to be towed out. If you do need to be
towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-39.
Loading Your Vehicle
Tire and Loading Information Label
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it was designed
to carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and
the Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’s
door open, you will find the label attached below the door
lock post (striker). The tire and loading information label
shows the number of occupant seating positions (A), and
the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
4-33
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the
size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-56
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-62.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear
axle. See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4-34
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-41
for important information on towing a trailer, towing
safety rules and trailering tips.
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
Example 2
Total
Item
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
300 lbs (136 kg)
B
700 lbs (317 kg)
C
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity Weight 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
for Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
750 lbs (136 kg)
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo Weight = 250 lbs (113 kg)
4-35
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity
weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the
driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s capacity weight.
Your vehicle has an electronically controlled air
suspension system that automatically keeps your
vehicle level as you load and unload your vehicle.
See Electronically Controlled Air Suspension
System on page 4-39 for additional information.
Example 3
Item
A
B
C
4-36
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity Weight 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
for Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo Weight = 0 lbs (0 kg)
Certification/Tire Label
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on
your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you
with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both
sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found on the
rear edge of the driver’s door. The label shows the size
of your vehicle’s original tires and the inflation pressures
needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle. This is called Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
all occupants, fuel, cargo, and trailer tongue weight,
if pulling a trailer.
4-37
Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs
and capacity weights. Please note your vehicle’s
Certification/Tire label or consult your dealer for
additional details.
If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases, tools,
packages, or anything else they will go as fast as the
vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if
there is a crash, they will keep going.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your vehicle
can break, and it can change the way your
vehicle handles. These could cause you to
lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your vehicle’s weight ratings.
Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the
right way.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
4-38
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service
if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-4.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with any of its
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed, see
“Towing Your Vehicle” earlier in this section.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two
of its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle
if any of its wheels will be on the ground.
Electronically Controlled Air
Suspension System
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled
air suspension system that automatically keeps your
vehicle level as you load and unload. The system
includes a compressor, two height sensors, and
two air springs supporting the rear axle.
The system also has an internal clock to prevent
overheating if the inflator is used for prolonged periods.
If the system overheats, all leveling function stops until
the system cools down. During this time, the indicator
light on the air inflator switch will be flashing.
The ignition has to be on for the system to inflate, in
order to raise the vehicle to the standard ride height after
loading. The system can lower the vehicle to the standard
ride height after unloading with the ignition on and also for
up to 30 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
You may hear the compressor operating when you load
your vehicle, and periodically as the system adjusts the
vehicle to the standard ride height.
Load leveling will not function normally with the inflator
hose attached to the inflator outlet. Remove the inflator
hose from the outlet during loading and unloading.
If the vehicle is parked for an extended period of time,
some bleed down of the suspension is normal. Upon
starting the vehicle, proper height will be achieved.
4-39
Overload Protection
Indicator Light
The air suspension system is equipped with overload
protection. Overload protection is designed to protect the
air suspension system, and it is an indicator to the driver
that the vehicle is overloaded. When the overload
protection mode is on, it will not allow damage to the air
compressor. However, do not overload the vehicle. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
The indicator light on the inflator switch in the rear
passenger compartment also serves as an indicator
for internal system error. If the indicator light is flashing
without the load leveling function or the inflator being
active, turn off the ignition. The next day turn on the
ignition and check the indicator light. The vehicle can
be driven with the light flashing, but if it is you should
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
If the suspension remains at a low height, the rear axle
load has exceeded GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).
When the overload protection mode is activated, the
compressor operates for about 30 seconds to one minute
without raising the vehicle depending on the amount
of overload. This will continue each time the ignition
is turned on until the rear axle load is reduced
below GAWR.
4-40
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section. Ask your
dealer for advice and information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow the
instructions in this section and check with your
dealer for more information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer”
that appears later in this section.
Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by
itself. Trailering means changes in acceleration, braking,
handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe
trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used
properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these
are important for your safety and that of your passengers.
So please read this section carefully before you pull a
trailer.
4-41
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but also
where you’ll be driving. A good source for this
information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later in
this section.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower
gear selection if the transmission shifts too often
(e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
4-42
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer,
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example,
speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and
how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. It can also depend on any special equipment
that you have on your vehicle, and the amount of tongue
weight the vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer
Tongue” later in this section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Use the following chart to find the maximum trailer
weight for your vehicle.
Vehicle
AWD (L6 Engine)
AWD (V8 Engine)
Axle Ratio
3.73
3.73
The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the
total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment
and conversion. The GCWR for your vehicle should not
be exceeded.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Max.Trailer Wt.
5,600 lbs (2 540 kg)
6,500 lbs (2 948 kg)
*GCWR
10,500 lbs (4 763 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of
your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes
the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in
it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If you
have a lot of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in
your vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight your vehicle
can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight your
vehicle can tow. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add
the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be
carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-33 for more information about your vehicle’s
maximum load capacity.
4-43
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to carry
tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle
to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect
of additional weight may reduce your trailering capacity
more than the total of the additional weight.
Consider the following example:
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up to a
maximum or 400 lbs (181 kg) with a weight carrying hitch.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 to 15 percent
of the total loaded trailer weight, up to a maximum of
750 lbs (340 kg) with a weight distributing hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension
that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle.
This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight
on the rear axle.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then
the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right simply by
moving some items around in the trailer.
4-44
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of
7,200 lbs (3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
and a GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
You can expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of
trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the weight
is applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on the rear
axle will be greater than just the weight itself, as much as
1.5 times as much.
The weight at the rear axle could be 850 lbs
(386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since the
rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding
1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg).
This is very close to, but within the limit for RGAWR
as well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs
(3 856 kg).
But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped with some
of the latest options and you have a front seat passenger
and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and
gear in the vehicle as well. You may add 300 lbs (136 kg)
to the front axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear
axle weight. Your vehicle now weighs:
But, you must still consider the effect on the rear axle.
Because your rear axle now weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg),
you can only put 900 lbs (408 kg) on the rear axle without
exceeding RGAWR. The effect of tongue weight is about
1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg)
by 1.5 leaves you with being able to handle only
600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight. Since tongue weight
is usually at least 10 percent of total loaded trailer weight,
you can expect that the largest trailer your vehicle can
properly handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
It is important that you make sure your vehicle does not
exceed any of its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,
Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. The only way
to be sure you are not exceeding any of these ratings is to
weigh your vehicle and trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you may
think that you should subtract 700 additional pounds
(318 kg) from your trailering capacity to stay within
GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer would only be
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think you
must limit tongue weight to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
to avoid exceeding GVWR.
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door
or see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33 for more
information. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW
limit for your vehicle, or the GAWR, including the weight
of the trailer tongue. If you use a weight distributing hitch,
make sure you don’t go over the rear axle limit before you
apply the weight distribution spring bars.
4-45
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
Weight Distributing Hitches and
Weight Carrying Hitches
If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will weigh
more than 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) be sure to use a properly
mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway control of the
proper size. This equipment is very important for proper
vehicle loading and good handling when driving. Always
use a sway control if the trailer will weigh more than these
limits. You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow
the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
(A) Body to Ground Distance, (B) Front of Vehicle
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must
be adjusted so the distance (A) remains the same both
before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle.
4-46
If your trailer weighs more than 1,500 lbs (680 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes — and they must
be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
Your trailer’s brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system only if:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi
(20 650 kPa) of pressure.
• The trailer’s brake system will use less than
0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.
If everything checks out this far, then make the brake
fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that
sends fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper
tubing for this. If you do, it will bend and finally break off.
Use steel brake tubing.
Driving with a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you have a rear-most window open and you
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon monoxide
(CO) could come into your vehicle. You cannot
see or smell CO.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
It can cause unconsciousness or death. See
Engine Exhaust on page 2-30. To maximize
your safety when towing a trailer:
• Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
• Keep the rear-most windows closed.
• If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main heating
or cooling system on and with the fan on
any speed. This will bring fresh, outside air
into your vehicle. Do not use the climate
control setting for maximum air because it
only recirculates the air inside your vehicle.
See Dual Automatic Climate Control System
on page 3-19.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get to
know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling
and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And
always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is
now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as
your vehicle is by itself.
4-47
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connection, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the
brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical
connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you
would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can
help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and
sudden turns.
4-48
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when you’re
towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal longer,
you’ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle
before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
Driving On Grades
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift down,
you might have to use your brakes so much that they
would get hot and no longer work well.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the
trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you’re
about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are
seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important to
check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or a lower gear, under heavy
loads or hilly conditions.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs similar
to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run
while parked (preferably on level ground) with the
automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a few minutes
before turning the engine off. If you do get the overheat
warning, see Engine Overheating on page 5-27.
4-49
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with
a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet. When parking uphill, turn your wheels
away from the curb. When parking downhill, turn your
wheels into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-50
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, axle lubricant, belt(s), cooling system and
brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,
and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re
trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections before
you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle is equipped with a seven-wire trailer
towing harness. This harness has a seven-pin universal
heavy-duty trailer connector (if equipped with the
trailering package) that is attached to a bracket on the
hitch platform. If your vehicle is not equipped with the
heavy-duty trailer connector, you can purchase one
from your Saab dealer.
The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer
circuits:
•
•
•
•
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Brown: Running Lamps
White: Ground
• Light Green: Back-up Lamps
• Dark Blue: Electric Brakes
• Red: Battery Feed (The chassis wiring ring terminal
must be fastened to a stud on the underhood
electrical center before the trailer feed will become
active.)
If you need to tow a light-duty trailer with a standard
four-way round pin connector, an adapter connector is
available from your dealer.
Your vehicle is also equipped with wiring for an electric
trailer brake controller. These wires are located inside the
vehicle on the driver’s side under the instrument panel.
These wires should be connected to an electric trailer
brake controller by your dealer or a qualified service
center.
4-51
✍ NOTES
4-52
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle ...5-4
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-5
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-16
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-19
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-21
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-22
Engine Coolant .............................................5-24
Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-27
Engine Overheating .......................................5-27
Cooling System ............................................5-29
Engine Fan Noise .........................................5-34
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-35
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-36
Brakes ........................................................5-37
Battery ........................................................5-40
Jump Starting ...............................................5-41
All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-46
Rear Axle .......................................................5-47
Front Axle ......................................................5-48
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-49
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-49
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ............5-49
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-50
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps ....................................5-50
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps ...................5-52
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-53
Windshield Replacement .................................5-53
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-53
Tires ..............................................................5-56
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-57
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-60
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-62
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-65
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-66
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Buying New Tires .........................................5-67
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-68
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-69
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-70
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-70
Tire Chains ..................................................5-72
Accessory Inflator .........................................5-72
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-74
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-75
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-76
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire ..........................................5-78
Secondary Latch System ...............................5-83
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-86
Spare Tire ...................................................5-88
Appearance Care ............................................5-89
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-89
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-90
Leather .......................................................5-91
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces ................................5-91
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-92
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-92
5-2
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-92
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-93
Finish Care ..................................................5-93
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ...........5-94
Aluminum Wheels .........................................5-94
Tires ...........................................................5-95
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-95
Finish Damage .............................................5-95
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-95
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-95
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-96
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-97
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-97
Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-97
Electrical System ............................................5-98
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-98
Headlamps ..................................................5-98
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-98
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-98
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-98
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ....................5-99
Rear Underseat Fuse Block ..........................5-105
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-108
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be
happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer for all
your service and parts needs.
Accessories and Modifications
When you add non-Saab accessories to your vehicle
they can affect your vehicle’s performance and safety,
including such things as, braking, stability, ride and
handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability,
and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction
control, and stability control. Some of these accessories
may even cause malfunction or damage not covered by
warranty.
Saab Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your Saab
dealer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine Saab
Accessories. When you go to your Saab dealer and ask
for Saab Accessories, you will know that Saab-trained
and supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine Saab Accessories.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
5-4
If you want to do some of your own service work, you will
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-65.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-15.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of
your vehicle.
Fuel
Gasoline Specifications
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
We recommend against the use of gasolines containing
MMT. See Additives on page 5-6 for additional
information.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than
87, you may notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs
service.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance may be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on and your
vehicle may fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-36. If this occurs, return to your
authorized dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the
condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may
not be covered by your warranty.
5-5
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work properly.
In most cases, you should not have to add anything to
your fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations. To help
keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean, or if your
vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or
valves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline. Also, your dealer has additives that
will help correct and prevent most deposit-related
problems.
5-6
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available
in your area. We recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must
not be used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel
that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system may be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If this occurs,
return to your authorized dealer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in
the country where you will be driving.
5-7
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island. Turn off your engine when
you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle — this is against the law
in some places. Keep children away from the
fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
5-8
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 5-92.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-36.
There may also be a light that comes on in the instrument
panel to let you know if your gas cap is not properly
installed. See Check Gas Cap Light on page 3-43 for
more information.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
by shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the
right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get
the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and
may damage your fuel tank and emissions system.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-36.
5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others
could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
1. To open the hood,
first pull the handle
with this symbol on it.
It is located inside the
vehicle under the
instrument panel
on the driver’s side.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push the
secondary hood latch up and to the right to release it,
then lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on
properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
Check to make sure the hood is closed and repeat the
process if necessary.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 4.2L L6 engine, here is what you will see:
5-12
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.
B. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System
on page 5-29.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid on
page 5-36.
D. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-35.
E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (Out of View).
See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-22.
F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-16.
G. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap
on page 5-27.
H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-16.
I. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Marked GND).
See Jump Starting on page 5-41.
J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-37.
K. Battery. See Battery on page 5-40.
L. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-99.
5-13
When you open the hood on the 5.3L V8 engine, here is what you will see:
5-14
A. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System
on page 5-29.
B. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-36.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-16.
E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-22.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-16.
G. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap
on page 5-27.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Marked GND).
See Jump Starting on page 5-41.
I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-35.
J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-37.
K. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-99.
L. Battery. See Battery on page 5-40.
5-15
Engine Oil
When to Add Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for the
location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
L6 Engine
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
V8 Engine
5-16
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area (L) for the
L6 engine or below the cross-hatched area at the tip of
the dipstick for the V8 engine, you will need to add at
least one quart/liter of oil. But you must use the right kind.
This section explains what kind of oil to use. For engine
oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications
on page 5-108.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area (F) that shows the proper
operating range for the L6 engine or above the
cross-hatched area for the V8 engine, your engine
could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine
oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you are through.
5-17
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should
also have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates that
the oil has been certified
by the American Petroleum
Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting standard
GM6094M. You should look for and use only an oil
that meets standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
5-18
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your
engine at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet standard GM6094M
are all you will need for good performance and engine
protection.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not
on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage
at which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,
you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will come on in the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-47. Change the oil as soon as
possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is
possible that, if you are driving under the best conditions,
the oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at this
time the system must be reset. Your dealer has trained
service people who will perform this work and reset the
system. It is also important to check the oil regularly and
keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change
your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
5-19
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime
your oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where you change your oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE
OIL message being turned on, reset the system.
To reset the Engine Oil Life System, do the following:
1. Use the fuel button on the Driver Information Center
to reach the ENGINE OIL LIFE screen.
2. Press and hold the select button on the Driver
Information Center five seconds while ENGINE
OIL LIFE is displayed.
3. OIL LIFE RESET will appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) display for 10 seconds
to let you know the system is reset.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system has
not reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-20
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking
it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of used oil, ask your dealer, a service
station, or a local recycling center for help.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
engine air cleaner/filter.
To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:
1. Remove the screws on the engine cleaner/filter and
lift off the cover.
2. Remove the air cleaner/filter from the housing. Care
should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible.
3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
4. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
{CAUTION:
When to Inspect
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after
each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If you are
driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each
engine oil change.
How to Inspect
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust
and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter is
required.
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
into your engine, which will damage it. Always have
the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.
5-21
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change
Automatic Transmission Fluid
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sure
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine part or
exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid
could cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure
to get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
5-22
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
•
•
•
•
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above
50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), drive the
vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has been
sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off, but this
is used only as a reference. Let the engine run at idle for
five minutes if outside temperatures are 50°F (10°C) or
more. If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have to
idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be low during
this cold check, you must check the fluid hot before
adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot will give you a more
accurate reading of the fluid level.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
The automatic transmission
dipstick handle with this
symbol on it is located in
the engine compartment
on the passenger’s side
of the vehicle.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or
in the HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check.
Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an
accurate reading.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down
to lock the dipstick in place.
Consistency of Readings
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
Always check the fluid level at least twice using the
procedure described previously. Consistency (repeatable
readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid level.
If inconsistent readings persist, contact your dealer.
5-23
How to Add Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while
it is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If the
fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to
bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check. It does
not take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L).
Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
5-24
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating
on page 5-27.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant. If you use this coolant
mixture, you do not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, your engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. Your
engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost would not be covered by your warranty.
Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could damage
your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture of the
engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling
system. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 for more information.
5-25
Checking Coolant
The engine coolant
recovery tank is in the
engine compartment on
the passenger’s side of the
vehicle. The cap has this
symbol on it. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at FULL
COLD, or a little higher.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
{CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost
never have to add coolant at the radiator.
Never turn the radiator pressure cap — even a
little — when the engine and radiator are hot.
Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful
not to spill it.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator.
For information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
see Cooling System on page 5-29.
5-26
Radiator Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
information on location.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-36 for more information.
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),
the display will show an Engine Coolant Hot/Engine
Overheated message. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-47 for more information.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant before you
open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle
until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly
damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered
by your warranty.
5-27
If No Steam Is Coming
From Your Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you:
•
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
5-28
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped,
pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast
as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
you are parked. If you still have the warning, turn off
the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
5.3L V8 Engine
4.2L L6 Engine
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
5-29
The coolant level should
be at least up to the FULL
COLD mark. If it is not, you
may have a leak at the
pressure cap or in the
radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water
pump, or somewhere
else in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
5-30
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again. The
engine cooling fan speed should increase when idle
speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down.
If it does not, your vehicle needs service. Turn off the
engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, but the coolant level
is not at the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® engine coolant
at the coolant recovery tank. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-24 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.
5-31
If the overheat warning continues, there is one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant mixture
directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is
cool before you do it.
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about
one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.
A hiss means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap. Remove the
pressure cap.
5-32
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL® coolant
mixture, up to the base of the filler neck. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-24 for more information about the
proper coolant mixture.
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL
COLD mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank,
but leave the radiator pressure cap off.
5-33
Engine Fan Noise
Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When the
clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide more air
to cool the engine. In most everyday driving conditions
the clutch is not engaged. This improves fuel economy
and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading,
trailer towing, and/or high outside temperatures, the fan
speed increases when the clutch engages so you may
hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal and should
not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making
extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system functioning
properly. The fan will slow down when additional cooling
is not required and the clutch disengages.
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure
the pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
5-34
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages.
Power Steering Fluid
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
reservoir location.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you
hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could
indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and
repaired.
For vehicles with the 4.2L L6 engine, the level
should be at the C (Cold) mark. For vehicles with the
5.3L V8 engine, the level should be at the FULL mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up
to the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
5-35
Windshield Washer Fluid
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the
What to Use
manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until
the tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
5-36
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not clean
as well as washer fluid.
when it is very cold. This allows for expansion if
freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have
your brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later your brakes will not work well, or will not work
at all.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid. Adding
brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid when
your linings are worn, then you will have too much fluid
when you get new brake linings. You should add or
remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned, and
your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid
only when work is done on the brake hydraulic
system. See “Checking Brake Fluid” in this
section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
5-37
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Look at the brake fluid
reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN.
If it is not, have your brake
system checked to see if
there is a leak.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-12.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep dirt
from entering the reservoir.
5-38
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 5-92.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a
high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are
worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come
and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving,
except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.
This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return
to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
5-39
Replacing Brake System Parts
Vehicle Storage
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When you replace parts of your braking system — for
example, when your brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may no
longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between your front and rear brakes can change — for
the worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When
it is time for a new battery, get one that has the
replacement number shown on the original battery’s
label. We recommend an ACDelco® replacement
battery. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
5-40
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-41
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it
safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be
damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the
parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the
jump start procedure. Put an automatic transmission
in PARK (P) or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL
before setting the parking brake. If you have a
four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case
is not in NEUTRAL.
5-41
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets, if equipped.
Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not needed.
This will avoid sparks and help to save both
batteries. And it could save the radio!
4. Open both hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminals on each
battery. Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) jump
starting terminal. You should always use this remote
terminal instead of the terminal on the battery. The
remote negative (−) terminal is located on the front
engine lift bracket on vehicles with the 4.2L L6
engine or the engine accessory drive bracket for
vehicles with the 5.3L V8 engine, and is marked
GND (Ground). See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on location.
5-42
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one. Do not
connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you will get a
short that would damage the battery and maybe
other parts too. And do not connect the negative (−)
cable to the negative (−) terminal on the dead battery
because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to
the positive (+) terminal
of the dead battery.
Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-43
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to the remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery. Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)
terminal, marked GND, for this purpose.
4.2L L6 Engine
5.3L V8 Engine
The remote negative (−) terminal is located on the
front engine lift bracket for the 4.2L L6 engine, and
on the accessory drive bracket for the 5.3L V8
engine.
5-44
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the remote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with
the dead battery.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always connect and
remove the jumper cables in the correct order,
making sure that the cables do not touch each
other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-45
All-Wheel Drive
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check fluid unless you
suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise.
A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected
and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading,
the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
5-46
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case, you’ll need to add some
lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not to overtighten
the plug.
What to Use
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
The proper level is from 0 to 3/8 inch (0 to 10 mm)
below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on
the rear axle.
What to Use
To add lubricant when the level is low, use SAE 75W–90
Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12378261, in
Canada 10953455) meeting GM Specification 9986115.
To completely refill after draining, add 4 ounces (118 ml)
of Limited-Slip Axle Lubricant Additive (GM Part No.
U.S. 1052358, in Canada 992694). Then fill to the bottom
of the filler plug hole with the Synthetic Gear Lubricant.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
5-47
Front Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the front axle, you may need to add some
lubricant.
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to
raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to
the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
5-48
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
If your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlamp
aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the low-beam
headlamps may be necessary if it is difficult to see the
lane markers (for horizontal aim), or if oncoming drivers
flash their high-beam headlamps at you (for vertical aim).
If you believe your headlamps need to be re-aimed, we
recommend that you take your vehicle to your dealer for
service.
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
{CAUTION:
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you
try to service any of the system components,
you could be seriously injured. Have your
dealer or a qualified technician service them.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-53.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Your vehicle may have HID headlamps. After your
vehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced, you
may notice that the beam is a slightly different shade
than it was originally. This is normal.
5-49
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps
Halogen Bulb Replacement
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
A. High-Beam
Headlamp
B. Low-Beam
Headlamp
5-50
C. Parking/Turn
Signal
D. Sidemarker
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11
for more information.
2. Lift the two headlamp retaining clips to release the
headlamp assembly from the vehicle.
5. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the headlamp assembly.
6. Pull the old bulb straight out of the bulb socket.
7. Install a new bulb and turn it clockwise to secure.
8. Reinstall the circular bulb covers, if necessary.
9. Reinstall the headlamp assembly by lining up the
headlamp assembly with the slots in the headlamp
retaining clips
10. Press down on the headlamp retaining clips to
secure the headlamp assembly.
HID Low-Beam Bulb Replacement
If your vehicle has HID low-beam headlamps and a bulb
needs to be replaced, see your dealer for replacement.
3. Pull the headlamp assembly away from the vehicle.
4. Remove the circular bulb cover for the high and
low-beam bulbs.
5-51
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate/Liftglass on
page 2-13 for more information.
2. Remove the screws
from the taillamp
assembly.
3. Pull the taillamp assembly away from the vehicle.
A. Back-up
B. Turn Signal
C. Stoplamp/Taillamp
D. Sidemarker
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the taillamp assembly.
5. Pull the old bulb straight out from the bulb socket.
5-52
6. Press a new bulb into the bulb socket.
7. Insert the bulb socket into the taillamp assembly
and turn it clockwise to secure.
8. Reinstall the taillamp assembly into the vehicle and
tighten the two screws.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-Up Lamp
Front Parking, Turn Signal Lamp
Front/Rear Sidemarker
Halogen Headlamps
High-Beam
Low-Beam (Halogen Only)
Rear Turn Signal
Stoplamp and Taillamp
Bulb Number
921
5702 NAK
194
9005
H11
3757 AK
3157
Windshield Replacement
Your vehicle is equipped with an acoustic windshield. If
you ever have to have your windshield replaced be sure
to get an acoustic windshield so you will continue to have
the benefits an acoustic windshield can provide.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield
when no wiper blade is installed could damage the
windshield. Any damage that occurs would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not allow the wiper
blade arm to touch the windshield.
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer.
5-53
1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiper arm
until it locks into a vertical position.
A. Blade Assembly
D. Blade Pivot
B. Arm Assembly
E. Hook Slot
C. Locking Tab
F. Arm Hook
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking
tab. Pull down on the blade assembly to release
it from the wiper arm hook.
5-54
3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly. The
insert has two notches at one end that are locked
by the bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the
notched end, pull the insert from the blade assembly.
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the insert (D),
notched end last, into the end with two blade
claws (A). Slide the insert all the way through the
blade claws at the opposite end (B). The plastic
caps (C) will be forced off as the insert is fully
inserted.
5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom
claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly
locked on both sides of the insert slots.
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm hook.
Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in the
hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
onto the windshield.
Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement
1. Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the
backglass. The backglass wiper blade will not lock
in a vertical position like the windshield wiper blade,
so care should be used when pulling it away from the
vehicle.
2. Pull down on the wiper blade assembly to remove it
from the wiper arm.
3. Replace the wiper blade.
A. Claw in Notch
B. Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation
5-55
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your Saab Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner Manual.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much friction.
You could have an air-out and a serious
accident. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-33.
CAUTION:
5-56
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
•
{CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
•
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if your
tires have been damaged, replace them.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-62 for
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
driving.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples
of a typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates
that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department
of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’s
width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information, see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-69.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. For information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-62 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
5-57
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that
can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to
support that load when used in a dual configuration.
For information on recommended tire pressure see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-62 and Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates
that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department
of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’s
width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s
TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
5-58
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that
can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to
support that load when used as a single. For information
on recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-62 and Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-33.
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of a
tire size.
(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letters LT as
the first two characters in the tire size means a light
truck tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates the
tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if the
tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item C of the light
truck (LT-Metric) tire illustration, it would mean that the
tire’s sidewall is 75% as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means
belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle
tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim
Association.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire.
The load index can range from 1 to 279. Speed
ratings range from A to Z.
5-59
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor vehicle
with standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but without
passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can
also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from
driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-62.
5-60
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to
279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of
a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-62 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that faces outward when
mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that contains
a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall
of the tire.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-66.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
5-61
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards):
A tire information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-69.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus the
rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-33.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and the
original equipment tire size and recommended inflation
pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information Label”
under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
5-62
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Premature or irregular wear
Poor handling
Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
•
•
•
•
Unusual wear
Poor handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s door
latch. This label shows your vehicle’s original equipment
tires and the correct inflation pressures for your tires
when they are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum amount of
air pressure needed to support your vehicle’s maximum
load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire and
loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-33. How you load your vehicle affects vehicle
handling and ride comfort, never load your vehicle with
more weight than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly
inflated even when they are underinflated. Check the
tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are cold. Cold
means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjustment is necessary.
If the pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck
the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
5-63
High Speed Operation
{CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes excessive
heat build up and can cause sudden tire failure.
You could have a crash and you or others could
be killed. Some high-speed rated tires require
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
operation. When speed limits and road
conditions are such that a vehicle can be driven
at high speeds, make sure the tires are rated for
high speed operation, in excellent condition,
and set to the correct cold tire inflation pressure
for the vehicle load.
If your vehicle has P255/55R18 104H size tires installed
on the rear axle, they will require inflation pressure
adjustment when driving your vehicle at speeds above
99 mph (160 km/h). Set the cold inflation pressure, for the
rear tires only, to the maximum inflation pressure shown
on the tire sidewall, or 36 psi (248 kPa), whichever is
lower. See the example following. When you end this
high-speed driving, return the tires to the cold tire inflation
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near the rim
flange. It will read something like this: Maximum load
690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure
for high-speed driving at 36 psi (248 kPa).
The inflation pressure for the front tires should be set
to the cold tire inflation pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
Racing or other competitive driving may affect the
warranty coverage of your vehicle. See your warranty
booklet for more information.
5-64
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check
for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time for
New Tires on page 5-66 and Wheel Replacement on
page 5-70 for more information.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use the
wheel wrench to tighten the cable. For information on
storing or removing the spare tire, see Changing a Flat
Tire on page 5-75.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
5-65
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-33, for an example of the label and its location on
your vehicle. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-108.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-75.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is
to check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
tread remaining. Some
commercial truck tires
may not have treadwear
indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-66
Buying New Tires
The original equipment tires installed on your vehicle,
when it was new, were designed to meet the Tire
Performance Criteria Specification (TPC spec) system
rating. If you need replacement tires, Saab strongly
recommends that you get tires with the same TPC Spec
rating. This way, your vehicle will continue to have tires
that are designed to give the same performance and
vehicle safety, during normal use, as the original tires.
The exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen
critical specifications that impact the overall performance
of your vehicle, including brake system performance,
ride and handling, traction control, and tire pressure
monitoring performance. The TPC Spec number is
molded onto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.
If the tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC spec
number will be followed by a MS, for mud and snow.
See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5-57 for additional
information.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes,
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires)
the vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct size,
brand, and type of tires on your vehicle’s
wheels.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
5-67
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that do
not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the
same size, load range, speed rating, and construction
type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s
original tires.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information Label. This label is attached
to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-33, for more information about the Tire
and Loading Information Label.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may affect
the way your vehicle performs, including its braking, ride
and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance
to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as, antilock brakes; traction control; and
stability control, the performance of these systems can
be affected.
5-68
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use Saab
specific wheel and tire systems developed for
your vehicle, and have them properly installed
by a Saab certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 5-67 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices,
and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system developed
by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration, which grades tires by treadwear, traction
and temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires.
The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply
to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver,
or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available may vary with respect to
these grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned
to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
5-69
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment may need to be checked. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your
tires and wheels may need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer for proper diagnosis.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
5-70
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-75 for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new original equipment
wheel.
5-71
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be injured in
a crash. Use another type of traction device only
if its manufacturer recommends it for use on
your vehicle and tire size combination and
road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your wheels. If you do find traction
devices that will fit, install them on the
rear tires.
Accessory Inflator
Your vehicle has an accessory inflator system. You can
inflate things like basketballs and bicycle tires. You can
also use it to bring your tire pressure up to the proper
pressure. It is not designed to inflate large objects which
will require more than five minutes to inflate, such as an
air mattress.
The accessory inflator
is located in the rear
compartment on the
driver’s side of the vehicle
behind an access cover,
near the liftgate opening.
To remove the cover, push in on the tab to access
the inflator.
You may have an air inflator kit that is located in the
glove compartment. It includes a 22 ft (6.7 m) hose with
three nozzle adapters.
5-72
To use the accessory inflator, do the following:
1. Attach the appropriate nozzle adapter to the end of
the hose if required.
{CAUTION:
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
inflate any object only to its recommended
pressure.
5. Press and release the switch to turn the inflator off.
Place the inflator kit tools in the pouch and store it in its
proper location. Remove the inflator hose from the outlet
during loading and unloading. Load leveling will not
function with the inflator hose attached to the inflator
outlet. See Electronically Controlled Air Suspension
System on page 4-39 for more information.
To reinstall the cover, line up the tabs at the back of the
cover, put it in place and latch the tabs.
A continuous flashing indicator light may also indicate
a malfunction in the air suspension system. See
Electronically Controlled Air Suspension System
on page 4-39 for more information.
2. Attach that end of the hose to the object you wish
to inflate.
3. Attach the other end of the hose to the outlet.
4. Press and release the switch to turn the air inflator
on. The indicator light will remain on when the
inflator is running.
The system has an internal clock to prevent the
system from overheating. The system will allow
about five minutes of running time, then the
compressor will stop. The indicator light will then
begin to flash. When the indicator is off, the inflator
can be started again by pressing the switch. If the
compressor is still hot, it may only run for a short
time before shutting off again.
5-73
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here are
a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would use
in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
5-74
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is designed
only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could be badly
injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack.
Use the jack provided with your vehicle only for
changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’s
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
The following information will tell you next how to use
the jack and change a tire.
5-75
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The jacking equipment you will need is stored under
the rear seat on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. See
Rear Seat Operation on page 1-6 for more information.
The tools you will be using include the wheel wrench (A),
wheel blocks (B), extension(s), (socket end) (C),
handle (jack end) (D), and jack (E).
The following instructions explain how to remove the
underbody-mounted spare located underneath your
vehicle.
To release the jack from its holder, turn the knob on the
jack counterclockwise to lower the jack head.
5-76
Notice: If you remove or restow a tire from/to
the storage position under the vehicle when it is
supported by a jack, you could damage the tire
and/or your vehicle. Always remove or restow a
tire when the vehicle is on the ground.
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate/Liftglass on
page 2-13 for more information.
2. Attach the wheel wrench (A) to the extension (C).
3. Insert the socket end
of the extension (C) on
a 45 degree angle
downward into the hoist
drive shaft hole. It is
exposed when the rear
gate is open and is just
above the rear bumper.
Be sure the socket end of the extension (C)
connects to the hoist shaft.
4. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare tire. Keep turning the wheel wrench until
the spare tire can be pulled out from under the
vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the
secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to
lower. See Secondary Latch System on page 5-83
for more information.
5-77
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Using the wheel
wrench, loosen all
the wheel nuts. Do
not remove them yet.
5. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable when
the tire has been completely lowered, and pull
it through the wheel opening.
2. Turn the jack adjusting knob clockwise by hand to
raise the jack lift head.
6. Pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
3. Place the handle, extension and wheel wrench onto
the jack.
Notice: If you drive away before the spare tire or
secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled,
you could damage your vehicle. Always reinstall
this cable before driving your vehicle.
7. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
5-78
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
Front Position
Rear Position
D. Extension(s)
A. Front Frame
E. Wheel Wrench
/Rear Axle
B. Jack
C. Handle
4. Place the jack in the appropriate position nearest
the flat tire.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the spare
tire to fit.
5-79
6. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
5-80
8. Place the spare tire on the wheel-mounting surface.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
9. Put the nuts on by hand. Make sure the rounded
end is toward the wheel.
10. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held
against the hub. If a nut cannot be turned by hand,
use the wheel wrench and see your dealer as soon
as possible.
11. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-81
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-108 for wheel
nut torque specification.
5-82
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque
specification. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-108 for the wheel nut torque specification.
12. Use the wrench to
tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system.
It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling
off your vehicle if the cable holding the spare tire is
damaged. For the secondary latch to work, the tire must
be stored with the valve stem pointing up. See Storing a
Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-86 for instructions
on storing the spare or flat tire correctly.
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack. If the
spare tire does not slide off the jack completely,
make sure no one is behind you or on either
side of you as you pull the jack out from
the spare.
{CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed below.
5-83
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,
do the following:
1. Check under the
vehicle to see if the
cable is visible. If it
is not visible, proceed
to Step 6.
2. If visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning the
wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or
feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times.
If the spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
Step 2 of Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on
page 5-76.
5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until
approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed.
5-84
6. Attach the jack handle, extension(s) and the wheel
wrench to the jack and place it under the vehicle
towards the front of the rear bumper. Position the
center lift point of the jack under the center of the
spare tire.
7. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it
lifts the end fitting.
8. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place. The
secondary latch has released and the spare tire
is balancing on the jack.
9. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until
the spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging
by the cable.
10. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
11. If the spare tire is
hanging from the
cable, insert the socket
end of the extension
connected to the wheel
wrench into the hoist
shaft hole just above
the rear bumper on a
45 degree angle
downward.
12. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare the rest of the way.
13. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it
through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from
under the vehicle.
Notice: If you drive away before the spare tire or
secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled,
you could damage your vehicle. Always reinstall
this cable before driving your vehicle.
14. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the cable
back up if the cable is hanging under the vehicle.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare tire using the hoist
assembly until it has been repaired or replaced.
5-85
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
Store all these in the proper place.
{CAUTION:
The underbody-mounted spare tire needs to be
stored with the valve stem pointing up. If the
spare tire is stored with the valve stem pointing
downward, its secondary latch won’t work
CAUTION:
5-86
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
properly and the spare tire could loosen
and suddenly fall from your vehicle. If this
happened when your vehicle was being driven,
the tire might contact a person or another
vehicle, causing injury and, of course,
damage to itself as well. Be sure the
underbody-mounted spare tire is stored
with its valve stem pointing up.
Notice: An aluminum wheel with a flat tire should
always be stored under the vehicle with the hoist.
However, storing it that way for an extended period
could damage the wheel. To avoid this, always stow
the wheel properly with the valve stem pointing up
and have the wheel repaired as soon as possible.
Follow this diagram to store the underbody-mounted flat
or spare tire.
A. Wheel Wrench
B. Hoist Shaft
C. Extension
D. Retainer
E. Spare or Flat Tire
(Valve Stem
Pointed Up)
1. Put the tire (E) on the ground at the rear of
the vehicle.
2. Remove the hubcap, if equipped, from the flat tire
by tapping the backside of the hubcap with the
wheel wrench (A). Store in a safe location until
the flat tire is repaired. Once the tire is repaired,
replace the hubcap.
3. Ensure the valve stem is pointed up and to the rear.
Then pull the retainer (D) through the wheel.
4. Put the socket end of the extension (C), on a
45 degree angle downward, through the hole
just above the rear bumper and into the hoist
shaft (B).
5. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue turning the wheel wrench (A)
clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip
twice. This indicates that the tire is secure and
the cable is tight. The spare tire hoist cannot be
overtightened.
6. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves, use
the wheel wrench and socket end of the extension to
tighten the cable.
5-87
7. Return the equipment to the proper location in the
vehicle as shown next.
4. Turn the knob (E) on the jack clockwise to raise the
jack head.
5. Return the rear seat to its proper position.
Spare Tire
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its inflation
pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-62 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33 for
information regarding proper tire inflation and loading
your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install
or store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-78 and Storing a
Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-86.
A. Handle
B. Wheel Wrench
C. Instruction Label
D. Extension
E. Knob
F. Wheel Blocks
and Jack
1. Attach the handle (A), wheel wrench (B) and
extension (D) in the slots provided.
2. Roll up the instruction label (C) and return to the
slot in the tool kit.
3. Assemble the wheel blocks (F) to the jack.
5-88
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. The spare tire is made to perform well
at speeds up to 70 mph (112 km/h) at the recommended
inflation pressure, so you can finish your trip.
Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced
as soon as you can and installed back onto your vehicle.
This way, a spare tire will be available in case you need
it again. Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes,
because they will not fit. Keep your spare tire and its
wheel together.
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from
your upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should
be removed as quickly as possible. Your vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains
to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the integrated
radio antenna and the rear window defogger. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft
cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by opening your vehicle’s
doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your dealer has a product for cleaning your vehicle’s
glass. Should it become necessary, you can also obtain
a product from your dealer to remove odors from your
vehicle’s upholstery.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
5-89
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively with
a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
your interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that leaves
streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about
20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils, always
try to remove them first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-90
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a small
hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally cleaned
area gives any impression that a ring formation may
result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the fabric
or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a soft
cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used.
Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot lifters
or spot removers on leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect leather may permanently change the appearance
and feel of your leather and are not recommended.
Do not use silicone or wax-based products, or those
containing organic solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior
because they can alter the appearance by increasing the
gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never use shoe polish on
your leather.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a clean
soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot
lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change
the appearance and feel of your interior and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to
clean your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on
your instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
5-91
Care of Safety Belts
Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
5-92
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. Use
a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps or chemical
detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well, removing all
soap residue completely. Approved cleaning products
can be obtained from your Saab dealer. See Vehicle
Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-96. Do not use
cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that contain
acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed
promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, or they
could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or
an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water
spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-92.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. You can get Saab-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-96.
If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish,
the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or
caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed
to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.
5-93
Windshield, Backglass, and
Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or
windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads
do not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, you
could damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Use only
Saab-approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
5-94
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish
on chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners
with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because
the surface could be damaged. Do not use chrome polish
on aluminum wheels.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are
not removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair
or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies
anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to
restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your Saab dealer. Larger areas
of finish damage can be corrected in your Saab dealer’s
body and paint shop.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the
frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your
Saab dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, Saab
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-95
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
5-96
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Description
Swirl Remover Polish
Cleaner Wax
Foaming Tire
Shine Low Gloss
Wash Wax Concentrate
Spot Lifter
Odor Eliminator
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step.
No wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans
and lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Vehicle Identification
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The eighth character in your VIN is the engine
code. This code will help you identify your engine,
specifications and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on the inside of the glove box. It is
very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label,
you will find the following:
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the
driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
•
•
•
•
VIN
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
5-97
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and
the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-65.
Headlamps
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses, one for each
headlamp, in the fuse block. An electrical overload will
cause the lamps to turn off. If this happens, have your
headlamp wiring checked right away.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
be sure to get it fixed.
5-98
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens, protecting the circuit until
the problem is fixed or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without — like the radio or cigarette
lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block is located in the engine compartment, on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location.
L6 Engine
5-99
Fuses
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
15
16
18
19
5-100
Usage
Electronically Controlled Air
Suspension
Passenger’s Side Headlamp
High Beam
Passenger’s Side Headlamp
Low Beam
Trailer Back-Up
Driver’s Side Headlamp High Beam
Driver’s Side Headlamp Low Beam
Washer
Automatic Transfer Case
Windshield Washer
Powertrain Control Module B
Fog Lamps
Stoplamp
Cigar Lighter
Electric Adjustable Pedals
Ignition B
Airbag System
Electric Brake
Fuses
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
50
51
52
53
54
57
Usage
Cooling Fan
Horn
Ignition E
Electronic Throttle Control
Instrument Panel Cluster/Driver
Information Center (DIC)
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock
Engine 1
Backup
Powertrain Control Module I
Oxygen Sensor
Air Conditioning
Truck Body Controller 1
Passenger’s Side Trailer Turn
Driver’s Side Trailer Turn
Hazard Flashers
Headlamp Driver Module
Air Injection Reactor Solenoid
Ignition A
J-Case Fuses
32
33
34
35
36
56
58
Relays
37
38
39
40
41
42
Usage
Trailer
Anti-lock Brake System
Ignition A
Driver’s Side Headlamp
Blower Motor
Trailer Turn Signal, Stoplamp
Passenger’s Side Headlamp
Usage
Headlamp Washer
Rear Windshield Washer
Fog Lamps
Horn
Fuel Pump
Windshield Washer
Relays
43
44
45
46
47
49
55
59
60
61
62
Misc.
48
Usage
High-Beam Headlamp
Air Conditioning
Cooling Fan
Headlamp Driver Module
Starter
Electric Adjustable Pedals
Air Injection Reactor Solenoid
Low-Beam Headlamp
Ignition 1
Powertrain
Vehicle Stability Enhancement
System (StabiliTrak®)
Usage
Instrument Panel Battery
5-101
V8 Engine
5-102
Fuses
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
Usage
Electrically Controlled Air
Suspension
Passenger’s Side Headlamp
High-Beam
Passenger’s Side Headlamp
Low-Beam
Trailer Back-Up
Driver’s Side Headlamp High-Beam
Driver’s Side Headlamp Low-Beam
Washer
Automatic Transfer Case
Windshield Washer
Powertrain Control Module B
Fog Lamps
Stoplamp
Cigarette Lighter
Ignition Coils
Transmission Control
Module/Canister
Ignition B
Airbag System
Electric Brake
Cooling Fan
Horn
Fuses
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
61
Usage
Ignition E
Electronic Throttle Control
Instrument Panel Cluster/Driver
Information Center
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock
Engine 1
Backup
Engine Control Module 1
Engine Control Module
Air Conditioning
Injector Bank A
Passenger’s Side Trailer Turn
Driver’s Side Trailer Turn
Hazard Flashers
Transmission
Oxygen Sensor B
Oxygen Sensor A
Injector Bank B
Headlamp Driver Module
Truck Body Controller 1
Electric Adjustable Pedals
Ignition A
5-103
J-Case Fuses
17
32
33
34
35
36
62
65
Relays
37
38
39
40
5-104
Usage
Trailer Turn Signal, Stoplamp
Trailer
Anti-lock Brake System
Ignition A
Blower Motor
Driver’s Side Headlamp
Passenger’s Side Headlamp
Vehicle Stability Enhancement
System (StabiliTrak®)
Usage
Headlamp Washer
Rear Window Washer
Fog Lamps
Horn
Relays
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
49
60
63
64
Usage
Fuel Pump
Windshield Washer
High-Beam Headlamp
Air Conditioning
Cooling Fan
Headlamp Driver Module
Starter
Electric Adjustable Pedals
Powertrain
Low-Beam Headlamp
Ignition 1
Misc.
48
Usage
Instrument Panel Battery
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
The rear underseat fuse block is located on the driver’s
side of the vehicle, under the second row seat. Pull
the seat cushion forward to access the fuse block.
5-105
Fuses
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
5-106
Usage
Right Door Control Module
Left Door Control Module
Endgate Module 2
Truck Body Controller 3
Blank
Blank
Truck Body Controller 2
Power Seats
Rear Wiper
Driver Door Module
Amplifier
Passenger Door Module
Blank
Left Rear Parking Lamps
Blank
Vehicle Center High-Mounted
Stop Lamp
Fuses
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Usage
Right Rear Parking Lamps
Locks
Liftgate Module/Driver Seat Module
Blank
Locks
Blank
Unlock
Ignition 0
Overhead Battery/OnStar® System
Rainsense™ Wipers
Sunroof
Accessory
Parking Lamps
Truck Body Controller Accessory
Truck Body Controller 5
Front Wipers
Ignition 3
Fuses
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Usage
Vehicle Stop
Transmission Control Module
Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning B
Front Parking Lamps
Rear Left Turn Signal
Heat, Ventilation, Air Conditioning 1
Front Right Turn Signal
Radio
Trailer Park
Rear Right Turn Signal
Fuses
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
Usage
Blank
Auxiliary Power 1
Blank
Ignition 0
Not Used
Blank
Front Left Turn Signal
Brakes
Truck Body Controller 4
5-107
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Cooling System
4.2L L6 Engine
10.8 qt
10.2 L
5.3L V8 Engine
12.2 qt
11.6 L
Engine Oil with Filter
4.2L L6 Engine
7.0 qt
6.6 L
5.3L V8 Engine
6.0 qt
5.7 L
Fuel Tank
22.0 gal
83.3 L
AWD Transfer Case Lubricant
2.0 qt
1.8 L
Transmission (Drain and Refill)
5.0 qt
4.7 L
Wheel Nut Torque
100 lb ft
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck the fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
5-108
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
VORTEC™ 4.2L L6
S
Automatic
0.042 inches (1.07 mm)
VORTEC™ 5.3L V8
M
Automatic
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-2
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-9
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9
At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-14
Maintenance Record .....................................6-15
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance may not be covered by warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or
the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and
to keep your vehicle in good condition, be sure to
maintain your vehicle properly.
6-2
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive
it. You may drive very short distances only a few times a
week. Or you may drive long distances all the time in very
hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle in making
deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in
many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need
more frequent checks and replacements. So please
read the following and note how you drive. If you have
any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-33.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the required
know-how and the proper tools and equipment
for the job. If you have any doubt, see your
dealer to have a qualified technician do the
work. See Doing Your Own Service Work on
page 5-4.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your dealer
do these jobs.
When you go to your dealer for your service needs, you
will know that trained and supported service technicians
will perform the work using genuine parts.
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-12 and Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 6-14. When your vehicle is serviced, make
sure these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives
the vehicle.
6-3
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL DIC message comes
on, it means that service is required for your vehicle.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-47. Have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving
under the best conditions, the engine oil life system may
not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a
year. However, your engine oil and filter must be changed
at least once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. Your dealer has trained service technicians who
will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the
system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally, you
must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since your last service. Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life
System on page 5-19 for information on the Engine Oil
Life System and resetting the system.
6-4
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL DIC message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it is
recommended that your first service be Maintenance I,
your second service be Maintenance II, and that you
alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.
However, in some cases, Maintenance II may be
required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the message
comes on within 10 months since the vehicle was
purchased or Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-16. Reset oil life
system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-19. An Emission Control
Service.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21. See footnote (k).
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 5-65 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month
on page 6-9.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. See footnote (g).
•
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
(125 000)
100,000
(166 000)
125,000
(207 500)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter (severe service).
See footnotes (g) and (h).
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (normal service). See footnote (g).
Automatic transfer case only: Change
transfer case fluid. See footnote (g).
•
•
•
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
•
V8 engine only: Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
•
6-6
•
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
(125 000)
100,000
(166 000)
125,000
(207 500)
150,000
(240 000)
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (l).
•
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc
brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition.
Inspect other brake parts, including calipers, parking
brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
6-7
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job,
have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced. The
airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assembly,
secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, rear
compartment hinges, outer liftgate handle pivot points,
rear door detent link, roller mechanism, liftgate handle
pivot points, latch bolt, fuel door hinge, cargo door
hinge, locks, and folding seat hardware. More frequent
lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips
with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal better
and not stick or squeak.
(g) Inspect hoses for cracks, chafing, leaks, kinks, and
proper installation.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service can
be complex; you should have your dealer perform this
service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-24 for what to
use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling system and
pressure cap.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
6-8
Owner Checks and Services
Engine Coolant Level Check
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your dealer can assist you with these checks
and services.
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary.
See Engine Coolant on page 5-24 for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for further
details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage to
your engine not covered by your warranty.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
check the spare tire. See Tires on page 5-56 for further
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-75.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-65.
6-9
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-27.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-27.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If
the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your
dealer for service.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your dealer for service.
6-10
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The key should come out only in LOCK.
Contact your dealer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill.
Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking
brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the
engine running and transmission in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your dealer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-11
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets Standard
GM6094M and displays the
American Petroleum Institute
Engine Oil
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on page 5-16.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
®
Engine Coolant water and use only DEX-COOL
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-24.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
Windshield Washer Solvent.
Washer
Parking Brake Chassis Lubricant meeting
of NLGI #2,
Cable Guides requirements
Category LB or GC-LB.
6-12
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Power
Steering
(Part No.
Power Steering U.S. 89021184, Fluid
in
System
Canada 89021186).
Automatic
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock
(Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Cylinders
Canada 10953474).
Chassis Lubricant meeting
Chassis
requirements of NLGI #2,
Lubrication
Category LB or GC-LB.
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (Part No. U.S. 12378261,
Front Axle
in Canada 10953455) meeting
specifications.
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (Part No. U.S. 12378261,
in Canada 10953455) meeting
specifications. With a complete drain
Rear Axle
and refill add 4 ounces (118 ml) of
Limited-Slip Axle Lubricant Additive
(Part No. U.S. 1052358, in
Canada 992694) where required.
See Rear Axle on page 5-47.
AUTO-TRAK II Fluid (Part No.
Transfer Case U.S. 12378508, in
Canada 10953626).
Usage
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring Anchor,
and Release
Pawl
Hood and Door
Hinges, Body
Door Hinge
Pins, Liftgate
Hinge and
Linkage,
Folding Seats,
and Fuel Door
Hinge
Fluid/Lubricant
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Usage
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points and
Hinges
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Dielectric Silicone Grease (Part No.
U.S. 12345579, in Canada 992887).
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
Superlube (Part No. U.S. 12371287,
in Canada 10953437).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
6-13
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part
Automatic Transmission Filter Kit
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
4.2 L L6 Engine
5.3L V8 Engine
Spark Plugs
4.2L L6 Engine
5.3L V8 Engine
Wiper Blades
Front – 22 inches (56 cm)
Rear – 13 inches (33 cm)
6-14
Part Number
24208576
15036141
ACDelco® Part Number
TF337
A2014C
89017342
88984215
PF61
PF46
12569190
12571164
41-981
41-985
15214346
15262794
—
—
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and
the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-15
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-16
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-18
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY) Users ..........................7-3
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-3
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-4
Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders ..................................7-6
Collision Damage Repair .................................7-7
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ..............................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to Saab ...................7-10
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-11
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Saab. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be
resolved by your dealer’s sales or service departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern
has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following
steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager,
contact the owner of the dealership or the general
manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Saab Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-955-9007. In Canada, contact Saab Customer
Assistance Centre by calling 1-800-263-1999 (English
and French).
7-2
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Your name, address and daytime phone number.
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.
• The name of the selling dealership and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
(kilometers).
• Nature and details of the problem you are
experiencing.
When contacting Saab, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a
concern.
If after contacting the Saab Customer Assistance Center
your concern has not been resolved, please refer to
the “Dispute Resolution Process” found in your Saab
Consumer’s Guide.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your Saab
ownership needs. Specific vehicle information
can be found in one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including an electronic version of this owner manual
(United States only).
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Receive e-mail service reminders
• Receive recall notices for your specific vehicle
• Receive special promotions and privileges
only available to members (United States only).
• Access a handheld companion (PDA) application
• Access an interactive vehicle design & racing game
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.owners.saabusa.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Saab has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Saab by dialing: 1-866-612-0380. (TTY users
in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Saab encourages customers to call the toll-free number
for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to write or
e-mail Saab, refer to the addresses below.
United States — Customer Assistance
Saab Customer Assistance Center
Saab Cars USA, Inc.
4405-A International Boulevard
Norcross, GA 30093
www.Saab.com
1-800-955-9007
1-866-612-0380 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-852-9001
7-3
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada, Limited
Customer Assistance Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-1999 (English and French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Roadside Assistance Program
Roadside Assistance
Saab has a strong commitment to customer satisfaction
and has established the Saab Roadside Assistance
Program. As the owner of a new Saab vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Program. This service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you
drive in the city or coast-to-coast throughout the
4 year/50,000 mile term of your New Car Limited
Warranty.
7-4
24 Hour Roadside Assistance Number
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year. Our advisors have access to a
nationwide network of recommended service providers.
The following services are available to handle related
emergencies.
•
•
•
•
•
Towing
Locksmith Service
Flat tire change
Gas delivery
Battery jump starting
If it is necessary to tow your disabled Saab, it will be
taken to the nearest authorized Saab dealer, whenever
possible. The cost of towing will be covered by Roadside
Assistance if necessitated by a mechanical breakdown
covered under the New Car Limited Warranty.
If your 2005 Saab is disabled due to a failure covered
by the New Car Limited Warranty “Bumper-to-Bumper
Coverage” and you are more than 100 miles from
home, Saab will reimburse you for certain expenses
in conjunction with the trip interruption. These expenses
include only reasonable and customary daily cost
for emergency lodging, meals, care rental or other
transportation to your destination incurred within
three days of the disablement, NOT to exceed $1000.
Calling for Assistance
Travel Planning
For prompt assistance when calling, please have the
following information available to give to the advisor:
The Saab Roadside Assistance Program also makes
available a variety of trip planning information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Your name
Location phone number
Location of your vehicle
Description of problem
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) (the 17-digit
VIN can be found in the lower corner of the
windshield, driver’s side, or on your registration.)
Model and model year
License plate number
Vehicle color
• Highway maps
• Suggested trip routing
• Points of interest/Tourist information
These items and more will be provided to you when you
call 1-800-852-9001 and outline your intended trip.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
Mileage (kilometers) on vehicle
Home address and phone
Name of your Saab dealer
While we hope that you never have the occasion to
require roadside assistance, it is an added security while
traveling for you and your family. Remember, we are
only a phone call away.
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-852-9001
7-5
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes, these
on-board systems do not record sounds, such as
conversation of vehicle occupants.
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called
event data recorders (EDR).
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. Saab will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to engine
speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle speed,
safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,
and the severity of a collision. If your vehicle is equipped
with StabiliTrak®, steering performance, including yaw
rate, steering wheel angle, and lateral acceleration, is
also recorded. This information has been used to improve
vehicle crash performance and may be used to improve
crash performance of future vehicles and driving safety.
In addition, once Saab collects or receives data,
Saab may:
7-6
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of Saab’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
• use the data for Saab research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-Saab organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information if
they have access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual
for information on its operations and data collection.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,
have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using
the proper equipment and quality replacement parts.
Poorly performed collision repairs will diminish your
vehicle’s resale value, and safety performance can
be compromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine Saab Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as the
parts with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine
Saab Collision parts are your best choice to assure that
your vehicle’s designed appearance, durability and safety
are preserved. The use of Genuine Saab parts can help
maintain your Saab New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior accidents. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment Saab part,
may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s
originally designed appearance and safety performance,
however, the history of these parts is not known. Such
parts are not covered by your Saab New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any related failures are not covered by that
warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than Saab and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your Saab New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
Saab also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your Saab dealer may have a collision
repair center with Saab-trained technicians and state of
the art equipment, or be able to recommend a collision
repair center that has Saab-trained technicians and
comparable equipment.
7-7
Insuring Your Vehicle
If an Accident Occurs
Protect your investment in your Saab vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to
your Saab vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with Saab
original equipment collision parts. If such insurance
coverage is not available from your current insurance
carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
Here is what to do if you are involved in an accident.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine Saab Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end of
your lease for poor quality repairs.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all
right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else
in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help. Do not
leave the scene of an accident until all matters have
been taken care of. Move your vehicle only if its
position puts you in danger or you are instructed
to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the accident.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame
of mind, or anything unrelated to the accident. This
will help guard against post-accident legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call Saab Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-4 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-8
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company
and policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the accident. They will walk you through
the information they will need. If they ask for a
police report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states with “no
fault” insurance laws, a report may not be necessary.
This is especially true if there are no injuries and both
vehicles are drivable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a Saab dealer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable
with their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
Saab recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine Saab parts or recycled original Saab parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
Saab vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine Saab parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated
to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine Saab parts,
even if your insurance coverage does not pay the
full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation
based on that insurance company’s collision policy
repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with that
company. In such cases, you can have control of the
repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
7-9
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to
the United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying General
Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or General
Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Place de Ville Tower C
330 Sparks Street
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Reporting Safety Defects to Saab
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a
situation like this, we certainly hope you will notify Saab.
Please call the Saab Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-955-9007, or write:
Saab Cars USA, Inc.
Saab Customer Assistance Center
4405-A International Boulevard
Norcross, GA 30093
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-1999 (English or
French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service Saab cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your Saab
dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE (1-800-463-7483).
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
Owner’s Information
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for Saab
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
Owner publications are written specifically for owners and
intended to provide basic operational information about
the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
7-11
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Publications are available for current and
past model Saab 9-7x vehicles. To request an order
form, please specify year and model name of the
vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
7-12
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
A
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3
Accessory Inflator ........................................... 5-72
Accessory Power Outlet(s) ............................... 3-18
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................... 1-66
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-98
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .................. 2-22
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-21
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-19
Air Suspension ............................................... 4-39
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-30
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-29
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-6
Airbag System ................................................ 1-51
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................ 1-66
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-59
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-61
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-65
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-59
Airbag System (cont.)
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-60
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-57
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-54
All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-46
All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System ......................... 4-13
All-Wheel-Drive Service Light ............................ 3-41
Antenna, Fixed Mast ...................................... 3-100
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ... 3-100
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 4-7
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-34
Appearance Care
Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-94
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-92
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-95
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-93
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-89
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-90
Finish Care ................................................. 5-93
Finish Damage ............................................ 5-95
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces .............................. 5-91
Leather ...................................................... 5-91
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-95
1
Appearance Care (cont.)
Tires .......................................................... 5-95
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-95
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-96
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-92
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-92
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ....... 5-94
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-58
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 3-98
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-100
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ........................ 3-99
Fixed Mast Antenna ................................... 3-100
Navigation/Radio System,
see Navigation Manual .............................. 3-84
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-60
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-73
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................................ 3-96
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-59
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 3-97
Understanding Radio Reception ..................... 3-99
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-100
Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-15
Automatic Transmission
Fluid .......................................................... 5-22
Operation ................................................... 2-24
2
B
Battery .......................................................... 5-40
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-18
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-25
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 4-7
Emergencies ................................................ 4-8
Parking ...................................................... 2-27
System Warning Light .................................. 3-33
Brake Pedal, Throttle ....................................... 2-22
Brakes .......................................................... 5-37
Braking ........................................................... 4-6
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-20
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-49
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-50
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-49
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps .................................. 5-50
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... 5-49
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-53
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps ................. 5-52
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-67
C
California Fuel .................................................. 5-5
California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-3
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-108
Carbon Monoxide ................... 2-13, 2-30, 4-28, 4-41
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-92
Your CD and DVD Player ........................... 3-100
Your CDs and DVDs .................................... 3-99
Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-53
Cargo Tie Downs ............................................ 2-54
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-51
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-72
Charging System Light .................................... 3-32
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-36
Gages Warning Light ................................... 3-41
Check Gas Cap Light ...................................... 3-43
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-95
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-33
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-29
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 1-39
Older Children ............................................. 1-27
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position ........................ 1-44
Child Restraints (cont.)
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Rear Seat Position ......................... 1-47
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position .......................... 1-47
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-38
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-94
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. 5-93
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-90
Finish Care ................................................. 5-93
Inside of Your Vehicle .................................. 5-89
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces .............................. 5-91
Leather ...................................................... 5-91
Tires .......................................................... 5-95
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-95
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-92
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-92
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ....... 5-94
Climate Control System
Climate Controls Personalization .................... 3-25
Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-19
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-24
Rear .......................................................... 3-24
Collision Damage Repair ................................... 7-7
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ..................... 1-24
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-16
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5
3
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-36
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-23
Cooling System .............................................. 5-29
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-11
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-40
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-50
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-3
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-3
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects to Saab .................. 7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government .............................. 7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ......................... 7-10
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-4
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-15
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Delayed Locking ............................................... 2-9
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dome Lamp Override ...................................... 3-17
4
Dome Lamps ................................................. 3-17
Door
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-9
Locks .......................................................... 2-8
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-14
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-43
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-44
DIC Vehicle Customization ............................ 3-52
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-47
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-19
City ........................................................... 4-23
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-3
Freeway ..................................................... 4-24
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-26
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-20
Off-Road .................................................... 4-19
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-32
Winter ........................................................ 4-28
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-19
DVD
Rear Seat Entertainment System ................... 3-84
E
F
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-98
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................... 5-99
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-98
Headlamps ................................................. 5-98
Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-98
Rear Underseat Fuse Block ......................... 5-105
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-98
Electronically Controlled Air Suspension System .... 4-39
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-21
Battery ....................................................... 5-40
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-36
Coolant ...................................................... 5-24
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-23
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-36
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-30
Fan Noise .................................................. 5-34
Oil ............................................................. 5-16
Oil Life System ........................................... 5-19
Overheating ................................................ 5-27
Reduced Power Light ................................... 3-40
Starting ...................................................... 2-21
Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-18
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................. 7-6
Exit Lighting ................................................... 3-18
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-26
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-21
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-95
Fixed Mast Antenna ....................................... 3-100
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-74
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-75
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-86
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-22
Power Steering ........................................... 5-35
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-36
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-16
Front Axle ...................................................... 5-48
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-5
Check Gas Cap Light ................................... 3-43
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-42
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-43
5
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................... 5-99
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-98
Rear Underseat Fuse Block ......................... 5-105
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-98
G
Gage
Check Gages Warning Light .......................... 3-41
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-36
Fuel .......................................................... 3-42
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-39
Speedometer .............................................. 3-27
Tachometer ................................................. 3-27
Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 3-32
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-46
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Gate Ajar Light ............................................... 3-42
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-50
6
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-5
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 5-49
Headlamps .................................................... 3-14
Automatic Headlamp System ......................... 3-15
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-49
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-15
Electrical System ......................................... 5-98
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-50
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps .................................. 5-50
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... 5-49
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
Washer ...................................................... 3-11
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-3
Heater ........................................................... 3-19
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-41
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-25
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-26
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-13
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-20
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-29
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-62
Instrument Panel
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness .................................................. 3-17
Cluster ....................................................... 3-26
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-41
K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-5
Keys ............................................................... 2-3
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall .....................................
Lamps
Battery Run-Down Protection .........................
Dome ........................................................
Dome Lamp Override ...................................
Fog ...........................................................
Reading .....................................................
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
Liftgate/Liftglass ..............................................
Liftglass/Liftgate ..............................................
Light
Airbag Readiness ........................................
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ...................
Brake System Warning .................................
Charging System .........................................
Check Gages Warning .................................
Check Gas Cap ..........................................
Cruise Control .............................................
Gate Ajar ...................................................
Highbeam On .............................................
Low Fuel Warning .......................................
Malfunction Indicator ....................................
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder ....................
Reduced Engine Power ................................
5-57
3-18
3-17
3-17
3-16
3-18
1-39
2-13
2-13
3-29
3-34
3-33
3-32
3-41
3-43
3-40
3-42
3-41
3-43
3-36
3-30
3-28
3-40
7
Light (cont.)
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-28
Security ..................................................... 3-40
Service All-Wheel-Drive ................................ 3-41
StabiliTrak® Indicator .................................... 3-35
StabiliTrak® Service ...................................... 3-35
Lighting
Entry ......................................................... 3-18
Exit ........................................................... 3-18
Limited-Slip Rear Axle ....................................... 4-8
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-33
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-12
Locks
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-9
Door ........................................................... 2-8
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-12
Power Door .................................................. 2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-18
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-43
Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-52
Lumbar
Power Controls ............................................. 1-2
8
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-15
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-14
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using .......................................................... 6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-36
Memory Seat ................................................. 2-55
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-47
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with Compass .... 2-37
Automatic Dimming Rearview with Compass
and Temperature Display ........................... 2-38
Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar®
and Compass .......................................... 2-33
Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar®,
Compass and Temperature Display ............. 2-34
Manual Rearview Mirror with Compass ........... 2-31
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-43
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror .................... 2-42
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-43
Outside Power Mirror ................................... 2-42
Moonroof ....................................................... 2-55
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3
N
Navigation/Radio System,
see Navigation Manual ................................. 3-84
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-20
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-14
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-27
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-27
Off-Road Driving ............................................. 4-19
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-16
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-16
Pressure Gage ............................................ 3-39
Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-19
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-27
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-43
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-24
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-43
Curb View Assist Mirror ................................ 2-42
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-43
Power Mirror ............................................... 2-42
Overhead Console .......................................... 2-51
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-9
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
9
P
Q
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-28
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-29
Parking
Brake ........................................................ 2-27
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-29
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-30
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-61
Passing ......................................................... 4-16
PASS-Key® III ................................................ 2-18
PASS-Key® III Operation .................................. 2-18
Personalization, Climate Controls ...................... 3-25
Power
Accessory Outlet(s) ...................................... 3-18
Door Locks .................................................. 2-9
Electrical System ......................................... 5-98
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-2
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4
Reduced Engine Light .................................. 3-40
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-21
Seat ............................................................ 1-2
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-35
Windows .................................................... 2-15
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-26
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-10
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-12
10
R
Radiator Pressure Cap .................................... 5-27
Radios .......................................................... 3-58
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-100
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ........................ 3-99
Navigation/Radio System,
see Navigation Manual .............................. 3-84
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-60
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-73
Rear Seat Audio .......................................... 3-96
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-59
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-97
Understanding Reception .............................. 3-99
Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-18
Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-47
Limited-Slip .................................................. 4-8
Rear Climate Control System ............................ 3-24
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-12
Rear Floor Storage Lid .................................... 2-53
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-24
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................... 3-96
Rear Seat Entertainment System ....................... 3-84
Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-6
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-21
Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper ......................... 3-10
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
Compass .................................................... 2-37
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
Compass and Temperature Display ................ 2-38
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
OnStar® and Compass ................................. 2-33
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with OnStar®,
Compass and Temperature Display .................. 2-34
Rearview Mirror with Compass .......................... 2-31
Reclining Seatbacks, Power ............................... 1-4
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-39
Reduced Engine Power Light ............................ 3-40
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-5
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-6
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire ............................................. 5-78
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-76
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-53
Replacement, Windshield ................................. 5-53
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-10
Saab ......................................................... 7-10
United States Government ............................ 7-10
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-67
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-68
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-21
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-21
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-4
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-32
Running the Engine While Parked ..................... 2-30
S
Safety Belt
Passenger Reminder Light ............................ 3-28
Pretensioners .............................................. 1-26
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-28
Safety Belts
Care of ...................................................... 5-92
Driver Position ............................................ 1-14
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-13
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-12
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................... 1-24
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-21
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-21
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-26
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-20
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-8
11
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seats
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-5
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-3
Memory ..................................................... 2-55
Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-2
Power Reclining Seatbacks ............................. 1-4
Power Seats ................................................. 1-2
Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-6
Secondary Latch System ................................. 5-83
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Rear Seat Position ............................ 1-47
Rear Outside Seat Position ........................... 1-44
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-47
Security Light ................................................. 3-40
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle .............................................. 5-4
All-Wheel-Drive Light .................................... 3-41
California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 5-3
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-36
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-65
Setting the Time ............................................. 3-59
12
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-95
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-28
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-29
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-7
Spare Tire ..................................................... 5-88
Accessory Inflator ........................................ 5-72
Installing .................................................... 5-78
Removing ................................................... 5-76
Storing ....................................................... 5-86
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-108
Speedometer .................................................. 3-27
StabiliTrak® System .......................................... 4-9
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ................................ 3-35
StabiliTrak® Service Light ................................. 3-35
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-21
Steering ........................................................ 4-14
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-98
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-51
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-50
Glove Box .................................................. 2-50
Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-52
Overhead Console ....................................... 2-51
Rear Floor Storage Lid ................................. 2-53
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-32
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-15
Suspension .................................................... 4-39
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-27
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
and Back-Up Lamps ................................. 5-52
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-97
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-16
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-16
PASS-Key® III ............................................. 2-18
PASS-Key® III Operation .............................. 2-18
Throttle, Adjustable .......................................... 2-22
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6
Tires ............................................................. 5-56
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning .......................... 5-94
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-67
Chains ....................................................... 5-72
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-75
Cleaning .................................................... 5-95
Different Size .............................................. 5-68
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-74
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-62
Inflator, Accessory ....................................... 5-72
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-65
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-78
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-78
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-76
Secondary Latch System .............................. 5-83
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-88
Tires (cont.)
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-86
Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 5-57
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-60
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-69
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-70
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-70
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-66
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-39
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-41
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-39
Traction
Limited-Slip Rear Axle .................................... 4-8
StabiliTrak® System ....................................... 4-9
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-22
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-24
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-27
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
U
Understanding Radio Reception ........................
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................
Universal Home Remote System .......................
Operation ...................................................
3-99
5-69
2-46
2-47
13
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-5
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-33
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Customization, DIC .............................. 3-52
Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders .................................... 7-6
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-97
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-97
Vehicle Personalization .................................... 2-55
Memory Seat .............................................. 2-55
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-24
Visors ........................................................... 2-15
Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-32
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-25
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-47
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
14
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-70
Different Size .............................................. 5-68
Replacement ............................................... 5-70
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-38
Windows ....................................................... 2-14
Power ........................................................ 2-15
Windshield
Backglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning .......... 5-94
Replacement ............................................... 5-53
Washer ...................................................... 3-10
Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-36
Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-53
Wiper Fuses ............................................... 5-98
Wipers ......................................................... 3-9
Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ........................ 3-10
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-28
X
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-100
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement